JP6568010B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some such gaming machines are configured to be able to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a game in which a reserved display is displayed as a special display when the effect actor apparatus returns to its original position after the stage effect apparatus moves and the hold display becomes invisible for a certain period of time. The machine is listed.

JP2011-50597 (paragraph 0330, FIG. 37, FIG. 38)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, aspects of the changes suggest effect is only one kind, not aspects of the changes suggested effect becomes monotonous, there may not be sufficiently obtained the presentation effect of the changes suggested effect.

Then, an object of this invention is to provide the game machine which can improve the production effect of change suggestion production.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and has a first display means (for example, a secondary display device) having a first effect display area. 9S (sub display device)) and second display means having a second effect display area (for example, effect display device 9 (main display device)), an effect movable body (for example, movable member 78) used for effect, A plurality of types of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, push button 120, stick controller 122), hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold storage, and specific display (for example, in the first effect display area) , hold display, viable specific display execution means the display of the active display) (for example, displays the hold display in sum pending memory display section 18c, a in the active display area 9A And displaying the revertive display), change suggests directing suggest changes in the specific display of the display mode (e.g., pending change announcement attraction, executable changes suggested directing execution means an active display change announcement attraction) (e.g., for the effect control in the portion. sixth embodiment for performing the steps S8106~S8117 in the microcomputer 100, step S6501~S6508 in effect control CPU 101, S8003～S8505, includes a portion.) to perform S8601～S8621, a director The movable body for operation and the operation means are operable, and the change suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect accompanied by the operation of the direction movable body and a change suggestion effect for prompting an operation to the operation means. , specific display execution means as a specific display, a hold display corresponding to pending memory, running Run the corresponding display and the display of which corresponds to odd display, in accordance with the displacement of the position of the first effect display area, by changing the special aspects suggest that controlled the display mode of the hold display advantageous state Even when the position of the first effect display area is not displaced, the display mode of the hold display can be changed to a special mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display is changed. In some cases, it is possible to operate the effect movable body (for example, in the sixth embodiment, step S8614 in the effect control CPU 101 is executed), and the change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display There when changing operating means (e.g., up Sshubotan 120, the stick controller 122) it is possible to operate the (e.g., the sixth embodiment smell embodiment of Te, partial) to perform the steps S 8617, S8620 in effect control CPU 101, changes suggested demonstration execution means, depending on whether prompt the operator to either the operating means during the execution of the change suggested effect, advantageously The change suggestion effect can be executed so that the degree of expectation controlled by the state is different, and the first change suggestion effect (for example, suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display in the first effect display area as the change suggestion effect (for example, First hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 with action effect A, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5)) and a mode that spans the first effect display area and the second effect display area 2nd suggestion effect (for example, 2nd hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) which suggests the change of the display mode of specific display The is feasible, expectation that either the first change suggested effect or second change suggested effect display mode of the specific display is performed is controlled to an advantageous state in accordance with whether the change is different (e.g., FIG. 60 As shown in the figure, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, as compared with the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. , The expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot is high), the display mode of the specific display may not change even if any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed. Depending on which of the two change suggestion effects is executed, the rate of change of the display mode of the specific display is different. According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects, the effect of the change suggestion effects can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the change suggestion effect executing means succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122) as the movable body. (For example, in the sixth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 executes step S8620 after determining Y in step S8612 to change the hold display or the active display, and in step S8612. N may be determined to end the processing as it is, and the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, for effect control in the sixth embodiment) CPU 101 executes steps S8617 and S8620 to execute step S8621). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the rendering effect by operating the operation means when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the change suggestion effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (for example, the push button 120, the stick controller 122) as the movable body. (For example, in the sixth embodiment, the production control CPU 101 executes step S8620 after determining Y in step S8612 to change the hold display or the active display. In some cases, it may be determined as N in step S8612 and the process may be terminated as it is), and the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, in the sixth embodiment, The production control CPU 101 executes steps S8617 and S8620 and executes step S8621. In some cases, the operation means is operated before performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes step S8610 when Y is determined in step S8609). The stick controller 122 may be vibrated slightly before execution and before the change of the hold display or the active display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the change suggestion effect executing means is a change suggestion effect (for example, a hold change notice effect A-1 to A- with character effect) in a mode not using the operation means. 3 and active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3) (for example, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing such as step S8602 when Y is determined in step S8601. to), when executing a change suggestion effect by embodiments using no operation means can perform the change indicated effect by mode is not operated the operating unit (e.g., in the sixth embodiment, the effect control for CPU101 Are step change notice effects A-1 to A-3 accompanied by character effects and active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3. 8613, S8615, executes only the processing of step S8621 it is determined that N respectively S8618) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect by providing the operation means even when it is not operated.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the change suggestion effect executing means performs any one of a plurality of types of display modes (for example, a blue round display and a red round display). The display mode can be changed, and the movable body is operated in different operation modes depending on which display mode is changed from the specific display (for example, in the sixth embodiment, effect control As shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the CPU 101 weakly vibrates the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 when changing to a blue round display, and pushes the button when changing to a red round display. 120 and the stick controller 122 may be vibrated strongly). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect by changing the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, it is possible to operate a display means (for example, the sub display device 9S shown in FIG. 71) provided with a display area for specific display as a movable body. (For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the sub display device 9S may be rotated when the display mode of the hold display is changed). According to such a configuration, the presentation effect can be improved by operating the display means provided with the display area for specific display.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the movable body is provided with a plurality of types of operation means (for example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122), and the change suggestion effect using any of the operation means is executed. (For example, in the sixth embodiment, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and the stick controller 122 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the push is performed. Compared to the case where the button operation effect is executed and the push button 120 is operated, the display mode of the notice target hold display or the active display changes when the super reach hit is large, and the operating means vibrates more frequently. And the ratio of strong fluctuations in the operating means increases due to the red round display. That) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, since the advantage differs depending on which operation means is used, it is possible to improve the effect.

(Means 8) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and includes a first effect display area (for example, a sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and a second Reservation storage means (for example, a first reserved storage buffer and a second reserved storage buffer) that stores the effect display area (for example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)) and the variable display that has not yet been started, as reserved storage. A hold display means (for example, a combined hold storage display unit 18c provided in the sub display device 9S) capable of displaying a hold display in the first effect display area corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means; step changes suggested directing suggest changes in the hold display of the display mode (e.g., pending change announcement attraction) in capable of executing changes suggested demonstration execution means (for example, effect control microcomputer 100 Comprising a portion) and executes the S8106～S8117, changes suggested demonstration execution means, first change suggested directing suggest changes in the hold display of the display mode in the first effect display area (e.g., the first pending change announcement attraction ( The hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect 3, the hold change notice effect 5)), and the display mode of the hold display by the mode in which the first effect display area and the second effect display area are linked . A second change suggestion effect that suggests a change (for example, a second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed, The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the second hold change notice effect is Executed When the display mode of the stop display is changed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed) And According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects, the effect of the change suggestion effects can be improved.

(Means 9) Still another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, wherein the first effect display area (for example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the first Correspondence that can display two effect display areas (for example, effect display device 9 (main display device)) and a corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display in the first effect display area during execution of variable display Execution of a change suggestion effect capable of executing a display means (for example, an active display area 9A provided in the sub display device 9S) and a change suggestion effect (for example, an active display change notice effect) suggesting a change in the display mode of the corresponding display. means (for example, portions for performing the steps S8106~S8117 in effect control microcomputer 100) and a change suggested demonstration execution means, to-the first effect display area First change suggests directing suggest changes in the display of the display mode (e.g., active display change announcement attraction 1 with a first active display change announcement attraction (action effect A, the active display change announcement attraction 3, active display change announcement attraction 5 )) And a second change suggestion effect (for example, a second active display change notice effect (action effect) that suggests a change in the display mode of the corresponding display by a mode in which the first effect display area and the second effect display area are linked. Active display change notice effect 2 with B, Active display change notice effect 4 and Active display change notice effect 6)) can be executed, and either the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the display mode of the display has changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, the second active display change notice effect is executed and put on hold. When the display mode of the display changes, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. And According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects, the effect of the change suggestion effects can be improved.

(Means 10) In the means 8 or 9, when the second change suggesting effect is executed and the display mode is changed, the degree of expectation is compared with the case where the first change suggesting effect is executed and the display mode is changed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is displayed. As shown in Fig. 41, when the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher. May be configured such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved by executing the second change suggestion effect.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 8 to 10, the second effect display area is a main display device (for example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)), and the first effect display area is It may be configured to be a display device (for example, a sub display device 9S (sub display device)). According to such a configuration, by using the main display device and the sub display device, it is possible to improve the production effect of the change suggestion effect.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 8 to 11, a variable storage that has not yet been started is stored as a reserved storage (for example, a first reserved storage buffer, a second reserved storage buffer), A hold display means (for example, a combined hold storage display unit 18c provided in the sub display device 9S) capable of displaying a hold display in the first effect display area corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means, and a variable display Corresponding display means (for example, an active display area 9A provided in the sub display device 9S) capable of displaying a corresponding display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display in the first effect display area. , changes suggested directing execution means changes suggested directing suggesting change of the display mode of hold display or the corresponding display (e.g., pending change announcement attraction, active display change announcement attraction The is feasible, possible is perform common changes suggested effect between when suggesting a change in the corresponding display of the display mode and when suggesting a change in the hold display of the display mode (for example, in FIGS. 45 and 47 As shown, the effect A is executed in the same effect manner when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. As shown in the drawing, even when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect B is executed in the same effect mode. Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which of the hold display and the correspondence display changes, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Means 13) A change that restricts execution of the second change suggesting effect when a predetermined effect (for example, a blackout effect) is being executed in the second effect display area in any one of the means 8 to 12. Suggestion effect limiting means (for example, in the second embodiment, a portion that proceeds to step S8118 without executing steps S8112 to S8117 when Y in step S8111X in the microcomputer 100 for effect control) is provided. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined effect.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 8 to 13, a value giving means for giving a value to the player (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S305 to 307 in the game control microcomputer 560), a value A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that suggests whether or not is given (for example, in the third embodiment, the part of step S554 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the specific effect The reliability notification means for executing the reliability notification that enables the player to recognize the possibility that the value is given based on (for example, steps S558 and S562 in the production control microcomputer 100 in the third embodiment). comprising processing a part to be executed), the specific effect execution unit comprises at least a second effect display area Run the specific effect (e.g., in the third embodiment, portions for performing the process of step S554 in the performance control microcomputer 100), reliability informing means executes the reliability notification in the second effect display area (For example, in the third embodiment, the portion of the production control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of step S558), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the reliability notification (for example, the super reach title notification period has elapsed) The reliability notification using the second effect display area is restricted at a later time and the reliability notification using the first effect display area is executed (for example, in the third embodiment, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the process of step S562 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the reliability notification is executed even during execution of the specific effect, and a decrease in the game entertainment can be prevented.

(Means 15) In any one of the means 8 to 14, the first effect display area (for example, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in the fourth embodiment) is an edge surrounding the display area. Is provided with a light emitting means (for example, LED) and displays an effect image, and a second effect display area (for example, the main image display device 5 in the fourth embodiment) displays the effect image and emits light. A light emission control means (for example, an effect control CPU 101) for controlling lighting of the means is provided, and the light emission control means displays an effect image in which the first effect display area and the second effect display area are related to each other (for example, In the process of step S756 of FIG. 52 in the fourth embodiment, when an image continuous with the image displayed on the main image display device 5 is displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (FIG. 3) or when displaying a plurality of character images displayed during execution of a predetermined effect process on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, respectively, or on the main image display device 5. When displaying images for assisting images on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, displaying images constituting a series of stories together with images displayed on the main image display device 5 on the image display devices 5a to 5d, When the image associated with the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, etc., the lighting of the light emitting means is limited (for example, the process of step S757 in the fourth embodiment) In other words, the effect control CPU 101 for turning off a part of the LED may be configured. According to such a configuration, even when an effect image in which the first effect display area and the second effect display area are related to each other is displayed, a decrease in effect (visibility) due to conspicuous edges is suppressed. can do.

(Means 16) In any one of the means 8 to 15, a variable storage that has not been started yet is stored as a reserved storage (for example, a first reserved storage buffer or a second reserved storage buffer). A hold display means that can display a hold display in the first effect display area corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means (for example, a combined hold storage display unit 18c provided in the sub display device 9S), a second Variable display executing means for executing variable display in the effect display area (for example, a portion for executing steps S801 to S803 in the effect microcomputer 100) and display control means for controlling display of the first effect display area (for example, fifth In the embodiment, steps S1632, S1635, S1636, and FIG. 1639, S1641, and partial) executing the S1642, the position control means for controlling for displacing the position of the first effect display area (e.g., in the fifth embodiment, the steps of FIG. 58 in effect control microcomputer 100 The display control unit changes the display mode of the hold display in accordance with the displacement of the position of the first effect display area by the position control unit (for example, the first display unit) (S1634, S1637, S1640, S1643). In the fifth embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the display mode of the hold display in accordance with the rotation operation of the sub-image display device 90, as shown in steps S1633 to S1643 in FIGS. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, since the display mode of the hold display changes in accordance with the displacement of the position of the first effect display area where the hold display is performed, the change of the hold display can be clarified and the interest can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding specific area | region and a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding change notice effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a reservation change notice effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an active display change notification effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of an active display change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of an active display change notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the image display apparatus and sub-image display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the synchronous display effect process in the variable display effect process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when each sub image display apparatus adjoins a main image display apparatus) in the synchronous display effect process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode of lighting / extinguishing of LED of an edge when each sub image display apparatus adjoins a main image display apparatus during execution of the synchronous display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when a part of each sub image display apparatus superimposes on a main image display apparatus) in the synchronous display effect process in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image display (when all of each sub image display apparatus overlaps with a main image display apparatus) in the synchronous display effect process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the left rotation pattern holding | maintenance change effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding change notice effect determination process in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change notice effect determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change timing determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation symbol fluctuation start process in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the active display change notification effect determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during effect design change in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during effect design change in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a hold display change notice effect when the sub-display apparatus is configured to be operable as a movable body.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the number of rounds per jackpot is the same as in this embodiment. Even if there is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big winnings per round and the big winning prize opening per round cannot be expected substantially. If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big winning opening, whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on the number of times, and for example, the number of opening of the big winning opening per round is different, so that it is possible to expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening. Even when there is a big hit that cannot be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit, and the display color may be different depending on the type of big hit (whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit). The display color may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big winning opening (for example, a big hit other than a sudden probability change big hit). If it is controllable, the display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the jackpot game, and the number of rounds per jackpot is the same as in this embodiment. Even if there is, for example, the opening time of the big prize opening per round is short (for example, 1 second), and the big winnings per round and the big winning prize opening per round cannot be expected substantially. If the opening time is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball in the big winning opening, whether or not the game ball can be expected to win in the big winning opening. The display color may be different depending on the number of times, and for example, the number of opening of the big winning opening per round is different, so that it is possible to expect the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening. Even when there is a big hit that cannot be made, the display color may be made different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to substantially win the big winning opening.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below a sub-display device 9S described later. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the sub display device 9S, but the interval between the lower end of the sub display device 9S and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 13 is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, below the effect display device 9, a sub display device 9 </ b> S configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) having a size smaller than the liquid crystal display device (LCD) constituting the effect display device 9 is provided. The display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an area (total pending storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Yes. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In addition, it replaces with the total pending | holding memory number display part 18c, and it comprises so that the 1st pending memory display part which displays a 1st pending memory number, and the 2nd pending memory display part which displays a 2nd pending memory number may be provided. May be. In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, but for example, the second special winning opening is performed. In gaming machines that are configured to give priority to the variable display of symbols, the variable display of the second special symbol is mostly executed in the high base state, and the execution rate of the variable display of the first special symbol is high in the low base state. Because it seems to be, only the first reserved memory number is displayed in the low base state, and only the second reserved memory number is displayed in the high base state. May be.

  In addition, the display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an active display area 9A in which a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed. In this embodiment, in the active display area 9A, a display similar to the hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is performed as a predetermined display. Hereinafter, a display in the same manner as the hold display displayed in the active display area 9A is also referred to as an active display. In addition, as long as it can be recognized that the display corresponds to the currently displayed variable display, the display need not be the same as the hold display, and other figures, characters, and the like may be displayed. .

  In this embodiment, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, whether the display is a hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, or the variable display of the first special symbol. Although the case where it displays without distinguishing whether it is a corresponding active display or an active display corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol is shown, it is 2nd whether it is a hold display corresponding to 1st hold memory. Whether the display is a hold display corresponding to the hold storage, the active display corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, or the active display corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed in a distinguishable manner. May be. For example, in this embodiment, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the normal mode, it is the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or the hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, or the first special display. A black round display is displayed uniformly without distinguishing whether it is an active display corresponding to a variable display of a symbol or an active display corresponding to a variable display of a second special symbol. When the active display change notice effect is executed, the hold display or the active display is changed to a blue or red round display), but the hold display or the first special corresponding to the first hold memory is shown. The active display corresponding to the variable display of the symbol is displayed as a black round display, while the active display corresponding to the variable display of the second reserved symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in yellow. It may be distinguished by displaying a form display. In addition, for example, a hold display corresponding to the first hold memory and a hold display corresponding to the second hold memory, or an active display corresponding to the change display of the first special symbol and a change display of the second special symbol. The shapes of the hold display and the active display may be different.

  In this embodiment, two liquid crystal display devices, that is, an effect display device 9 and a sub display device 9S, are provided. However, the effect display device 9 is also called a main display device, and the sub display device 9S is a sub display. Also called a device. Further, in this embodiment, the main display device refers to a liquid crystal display device used for performing various main effect displays such as a change display of effect symbols. The display executed by the main display device and the sub display device is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a part of the notice effect or the big hit display is displayed on the sub display device. You may comprise. As such, it is sufficient that the main display device performs at least a main effect such as a change display of the effect symbols and displays the hold display and the active display on the sub display device. The sub display device 9 (sub display device) may be configured to perform variable display.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out-port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation is a big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and effects). The display device 9 shifts to a high base state that is a gaming state controlled so that a variable display execution condition on the display device 9 is easily established (in this embodiment, shifts to a time-short state). In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state) (high You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the effect symbol and display control of the sub display device 9S are performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  The effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 125, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 provided in the stick controller 122, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 provided in the push button 120, as will be described later. However, the illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 and display control of the sub display device 9S based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 and display control of the sub display device 9S in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), and background image data. This is a ROM for storing in advance. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined effect period (for example, a change period of the effect symbol).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. A value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in a case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that will not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and then by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reams, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-continuity. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of detachment, non-reach CA 2-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slide effect, and non-reach CA2-1, which does not involve reach, A non-reach CA 2-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with an effect, and a non-reach CA 2-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation that is not accompanied by an effect such as a reach or a pseudo-ream or a slip effect. Normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, Normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with two normal reach and revariation pseudo-continuations, normal reach and revariation Normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one pseudo-ream, and super Are type divided into super CA2-7 and a variation pattern type with reach.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number as the jackpot determining random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a short time state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b determine that the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, in the big hit type determination table 131a, five decision values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” (40 minutes). Is determined to be a sudden probability change big hit at a rate of 5), whereas in the big hit type determination table 131b, one determination value is assigned to "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 1/40) Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability variation big hit as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value The first specific gaming state may be determined at a high rate when the first special symbol variation display is executed, and may be determined as a 15-round normal big hit or probable big hit as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of jackpots include “normal jackpot”, “probability variation jackpot”, and “sudden probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types, “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. However, the number is not limited to three, for example, four or more types. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to the short-time state only after the big hit gaming state ends (see step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time reduction state is ended (see steps S168 and S137 to S140). Even if the variable display is not finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is also finished when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, it is changed to the probable change state and the short time state is also entered. (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the probability change state and also to the short time state. Step S169, which will be described later). (See S170). Then, until the next big hit occurs, the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue (see step S132).

  Note that the mode of sudden probability change big hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as a normal big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be as short as 0.1 seconds.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured so that all the big hit types are probable big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you are configured to provide a small hit, suddenly probable big hits that do not involve a short-time state (high base state) just by shifting to a probable state (high probability state). (It is preferable that the opening pattern of the big prize opening is the same in the case of the sudden probability change big hit and the small win).

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and corresponding to the “normal big hit”, “probability variable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type determination value) ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random value (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, and FIG. 9B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the case of controlling to the big hit state by normal big hit or probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135 </ b> C used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time-short state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a loss symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the game state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state and the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> C are used for the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more are shown. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is used in which the variation pattern type determination table 135C for probability variation / shortening time is used regardless of the total number of stored storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. The “expected degree (reliability)” for the jackpot indicates the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by a reach, and is not accompanied by an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. It is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit is not made.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current game state is shown. However, the current game state is a probable state or a time-short state. Depending on whether it is a normal state or not, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and sliding effects, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes special PG 1-1 and special PG 2-1, which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects. You may comprise so that special PG1-2, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 accompanying effects, such as an effect, may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used for “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, and the small hit for “suddenly promiscuous big hit” or “small hit”. / Sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “normal jackpot” or the “probability big hit”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, as a command for specifying the number of reserved memories, a case of transmitting a combined reserved memory number specifying command for specifying the total reserved memory number is shown, but the first reserved memory, the second reserved memory, It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has been won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command to be transmitted as the stored storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 22), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in a probable change state or a short time state and out of place at the time of winning a start, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a pending change notice effect, which is a kind of prefetch notice effect, is executed based on the winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3. Is done. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when execution of a hold change notice effect, which is a kind of prefetch notice effect, is determined when a start winning is generated, the hold display is displayed in a normal mode (in this example, a black round display). ) Is executed to change to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the special display mode. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and then the action effect (the action described later) is started at the timing of the hold display shift. The effect A or the effect B) is executed, and the effect of changing the hold display of the notice target to any special display mode is executed (therefore, in this embodiment, the hold change notice effect is at least an action. Including both the part that performs the production and the part that changes the hold display of the notice target) If the display mode of the hold display is changed after the hold change notice effect is executed, the hold memory of the notice target is digested at the timing when the variable display of the notice target is subsequently started, and the special display mode of the notice target is displayed. While the hold display is erased, the special display mode active display is displayed in the active display area 9A. Then, when the change display of the notice target is finished, the active display of the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the special display mode (hold display, active display) is continued until the change display of the notice target is finished.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and in addition to the pending change notice effect, for example, as a pre-reading notice effect, a special display such as a chance eye symbol continuously over a plurality of variations. Various effects such as performing an effect that stops and displays the result, performing an effect that counts down over multiple variations, or performing an effect that changes the effect mode in such a way that the background screen changes Embodiments are possible.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number is given to the audio output board 70. Or output data.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S313, S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 20A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S312. FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S314.

  First, the first start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process that is executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4) is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1214A).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 21A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 21A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) (see FIG. 21B). Step S1215A). In the process of step S1215A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the time of starting winning (step S1216A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1217A) and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1218A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1219A) and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1217A and S1218A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol every time the first start winning opening 13 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1216A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1217A to S1220A is executed, the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1216A is executed. A set of four commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, a first start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command, are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process that is executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the aggregated reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1214B).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21B) ( Step S1215B). In the process of step S1215B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-time effect process (step S1216B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1217B), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1218B). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1219B), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S1217B and S1218B, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start-up winning is performed at the second start winning opening 14 and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1216B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1217B to S1220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S1216B is executed. A set of four commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, a second start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1216A and S1216B. In the winning presentation process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A hold change notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol by 100.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probability variation state.) For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1216A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1216B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability change flag and a time reduction flag are set). Determine. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning, until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 and whether or not the state is the short time state and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the symbol designating command for the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit”. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing at step S1216A is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1216B is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that the “sudden probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “sudden probability change big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “normal big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 38 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1215A and S1215B to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set, and in step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “09 (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a hold change notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 21A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start a winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. You may be made to give priority to the variable display of special symbols.

  In addition, when it is configured so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as described above, it is not necessary to store the winning order, so the reserved storage specific information storage shown in FIG. An area (pending specific area) is not required.

  In addition, when it is configured so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority as described above, when the gaming state is the short-time state (high base state) or the big hit gaming state, No winning determination (pre-reading determination) is performed for the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13, and a winning determination (pre-reading determination) is made for the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 only in the low base state. ) Is desirable. Specifically, in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 20 (A), when step S1215A is completed, it is determined whether or not it is in a time-saving state (specifically, whether or not a time-saving flag is set). ), And whether or not a big hit game is being played (specifically, whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more). What is necessary is just to skip the process of S1216A-S1218B and to transfer to step S1219A. In such a case, there is a situation in which the hold change notice effect for the first hold memory is executed in spite of the fact that only the change display of the second special symbol is executed during the short time state (high base state). It is possible to prevent the big hit that exists in the first reserved memory from being stocked, and to make it possible to aim at the big hit even with the second special symbol's variable display, and to prevent hunger more than necessary. can do.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved memory number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 is for determining the big hit that has been extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and previously stored in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (a normal state or a short time state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S1215A of the first start port switch passing process or step S1215B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D as a table used to determine the variation pattern type from among a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state or the time reduction state, and is reset when the time reduction state ends. Specifically, when it is determined to be “ordinary jackpot”, the time reduction flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. In addition, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the hourly flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be “probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, in the process of ending the big hit game, the probability change flag is set and the time reduction flag is set. When the next big hit occurs, the time reduction flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

  If the time flag is not set (N in Step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total pending storage number is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state (in this embodiment, the time reduction state is always set when the state is changed to the probability change state. (Refer to steps S169 and S170), if it is determined as Y in step S95, the CPU 56 may change the variation pattern type. Is selected as one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S99 is executed and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time-shortening state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S102. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of a shortened change may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (see FIG. 10). 10 (B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probabilistic change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S94, S97, S98 or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including super CA2-7 fluctuation pattern types), and select one of the fluctuation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a determination is made in advance as to whether or not “non-reach” will occur and a hold change notice effect is performed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of the big hit is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . Then, when neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probable change big hit” (that is, “suddenly probable big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S116), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S132), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot” or “probability jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the hourly state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S144). In addition, the opening time per time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds which is the same as the round time for the sudden probability change big hit is set as the opening time for one big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, when it is “ordinary big hit” or “probable big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “sudden probability big hit”, small hit / sudden probability big hit An end designation command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit that ends this time is a normal big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag and shifts to a time reduction state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction number counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S169) and sets the time reduction flag to shift to the time reduction state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  33 and 34 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 first receives the symbol designation command received in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of these, the latest symbol designating command is stored in the storage area (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S626). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 increments the normal mode hold display (in this example, a black round display) by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c of the sub display device 9S, and the sum display block 18c in the total hold storage display unit 18c. The total pending storage number display is updated (step S627).

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S628), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S629). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 increments the normal mode hold display (in this example, a black round display) by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c of the sub display device 9S, and the sum display block 18c in the total hold storage display unit 18c. The total pending storage number display is updated (step S630).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S631), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. In the storage area, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command, second start prize designation command) are stored in the storage area (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the total pending storage number designated by the total pending storage number designation command in the total pending storage number storage area provided in the RAM (step S633).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S634), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the total pending storage number stored in the total pending storage number storage area (step S635). . Further, the production control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the sum hold display section 18c of the sub display device 9S, shifts the remaining hold display one by one, and adds the sum hold storage in the sum hold storage display section 18c. The number display is updated (step S636).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S637). For example, if the effect control command received is the first symbol variation designation command, the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command is set. Set the reception flag. Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change notice effect determining process for determining a hold change notice effect (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the hold change notice effect determination process (step S800A). In the pending change notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 firstly includes a set of commands at the time of start winning (that is, a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a start winning specifying command (a first start winning specification command or a second start). It is confirmed whether or not a new winning designation command) and a set of combined pending storage number designation commands have been received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command), and total pending storage number designation command are stored in the start prize command storage area. Can be confirmed by determining whether or not is newly stored. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command at the time of a start winning prize is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag indicating that the hold change notice effect has already been determined is set. Confirmation is made (step S6002). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, the processing is ended as it is.

  After the process of step S6002 is executed, after the execution of the hold change notice effect is determined based on the occurrence of a new start prize, the next change display has not yet started, and the display form of the hold display of the notice target When a new start prize is generated during a period in which has not yet changed, control is performed so as not to repeatedly determine the pending change notice effect.

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (step S6003). Whether or not the current total pending storage number is 2 or more is specifically determined by checking the total pending storage number stored in the total pending storage number storage area (see steps S633 and S635). Can be judged. If the total pending storage number is not 2 or more, the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing of the shift of the hold display (the start timing of the next variable display) after the start winning. In this case, the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed at the timing of the shift of the hold display unless at least two combined hold memories are accumulated at the timing of the start winning prize. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the determination process in step S6003, the hold change notice effect can be executed when the combined hold memory number is 2 or more, and the hold change notice effect is determined. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the hold display to be notified is already digested and the display mode cannot be changed at the timing of the hold display shift.

  Even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it may be configured to be able to execute some change notice effect. In this case, for example, after the start winning has occurred, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area 9A is executed even after the hold display for the advance notice is shifted and deleted. You may comprise. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a hold change notice effect with an action effect is executed when the hold display is shifted to start the change display. For example, a predetermined second after the start of the change display ( For example, it may be configured to execute the hold change notice effect accompanied by the effect effect during the variable display such as after 10 seconds or after 15 seconds. In this case, even if the total pending storage number is 1, if the execution timing of the pending change notice effect remains in the remaining time of the currently displayed variable display, the pending change notice effect is configured to be executed. May be.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, but for example, the second special winning opening is performed. In gaming machines that are configured to give priority to the variable display of symbols, the variable display of the second special symbol is mostly executed in the high base state, and the execution rate of the variable display of the first special symbol is high in the low base state. Therefore, only the prefetch determination for the first reserved memory may be executed during the low base state, and only the prefetch determination for the second reserved memory may be executed during the high base state. In this case, in step S6003, when the low base state is set, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number that is the target of the prefetch determination is 2 or more. It may be configured to determine whether or not the second reserved storage number that is the target of the above is two or more.

  If the total pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and type of the pending change notice effect based on the received latest variation category command (step S6004). In step S6004, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the hold change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the hold change notice effect, Determine the type.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold change notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the hold change notice effect 1 and the hold change notice effects 1 to 6, respectively, in the hold change notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, there are six types of hold change notice effects 1 to 6 as hold change notice effects.

  The hold change notice effect 1 does not change the display mode of the hold display in the normal form (in this example, a black round display) only by executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. It is. In addition, the hold change notice effect 2 only performs the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift, and does not change the hold display display mode in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). This is a notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect 1 or the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed, and the display mode of the hold display is Since it does not change, it corresponds to the so-called Gase hold change notice effect.

  The hold change notice effect 3 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 4 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 5 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display. The hold change notice effect 6 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, there are two types of action effects A and action effects B as action effects executed in the pending change notice effect. The action effect A is an action effect performed using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device). The action effect B is an action effect performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In addition, when performing the effect, it is not performed using only the liquid crystal display device. For example, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the hold display or the active display is changed, or a lamp or LED is emitted. For example, it may be accompanied by an effect by another effect device.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, when the determination result indicated by the variation category command is non-reach (variation category 1 indicating that the determination result is a variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1). When the designated command is received), or when the super reach is out of place (when the variation category 8 designation command indicating that it is a determination result with the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is received), it is indicated by the variation category command. When the determination result is a super reach jackpot (when a variation category 23 designation command or a variation category 26 command indicating that it is a determination result with the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 is received), execution of a pending change notice effect May be determined.

  In this embodiment, the hold change notice effect is an effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the sub display device 9S (in this example, the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect 3). , And hold change notice effect 5. Hereinafter, the first hold change notice effect) and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the manner in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are linked (this example). In FIG. 37, the change is roughly divided into hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4, and hold change notice effect 6. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a second hold change notice effect. As shown, in the case of a super reach big hit, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, when the non-reach shift or the super reach shift occurs, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is relatively executed is higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. It is low. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. In comparison, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are a change mode of the display mode of the hold display, in which the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display and a red round display. As shown in FIG. 37, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the blue round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the red round display. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, when the second hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the red round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the blue round display. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display of the notice target is a blue round shape. The display ratio of the display and the red round display is different.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display does not change even if the hold change notice effect is executed (that is, the hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 and hold change notice effect 2) of the gusset is executed). If you want to) In addition, as shown in FIG. 37, the ratio of the first hold change notice effect (Gase change notice notice effect 1 in this example) to be executed is the same as the second hold change notice effect (In this example, It is higher than the rate at which the hold change notice effect 2) is executed. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display of the notice target varies depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect 2) is the first hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, hold change notice effect). Since the execution rate is lower than 1), the rate at which the hold display of the notification target changes is relatively greater when the second hold change notice effect is executed than when the first hold change notice effect is executed. Is expensive. In addition, not only in the mode shown in this embodiment, the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed is relatively less noticeable than the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed. You may comprise so that the ratio that a hold display changes may become high.

  Note that the method of allocating the determination of the pending change notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when it is configured so that there is a case where it is possible to recognize which hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the subject of notice in the stage before the change of the hold indication, and a case where it cannot be recognized, The execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the hold display can be recognized or not. In this case, for example, a hold display in a display mode (for example, a white round display) that is different from the normal mode but different from the final change mode (in this example, blue or red round display) in the hold change notice effect. In addition, when a hold display (so-called white hold display) that suggests that the display mode is changed is configured to be displayable, any hold display is notified depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed. We can infer whether it can be targeted. Therefore, the execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed only once in the hold change notice effect is shown, but the display mode of the hold display may be configured to be changed a plurality of times (further, It may be configured to be able to change multiple times including after the active display). In this case, in the on-hold change notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, the number of changes, the change pattern at each timing, and the display pattern (color, etc.) for each change are determined collectively. You may comprise as follows. Also, for example, in the case of a configuration that can be changed a plurality of times including after the active display, the change pattern including the change after the active display is collectively determined in the pending change notice effect determination process. Alternatively, only the change pattern of the hold display is determined in the hold change notice effect determination process, and the change pattern after the active display is determined is determined by the effect symbol change start process at the start of change. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the action effect is always executed in the hold change notice effect is shown. However, this is not the only case, and the display mode of the hold display changes without performing the action effect. You may comprise so that there may be. In addition, in the case where a hold change notice effect without such an effect is executed, and when the display mode of the hold display (including the active display) may be changed a plurality of times as described above, You may comprise so that the effect presentation may be performed at the timing of the change timing of multiple times, and the number of executions of the effect presentation may be determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the effect effect B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the effect effect A is executed, or the so-called “gase hold change” Although the case where the degree of advantage is high such as a small proportion of the notice effect is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when the effect effect B is executed, the advantage degree may be lower than when the effect effect A is executed.

  If execution of the hold notice effect is determined (Y in step S6005), the effect control CPU 101 sets a hold change notice effect determination flag (step S6006). Further, the production control CPU 101 stores the type of the pending change announcement effect determined in step S6004 (in this example, the pending change announcement effect 1 to 6) in the pending change announcement effect storage area provided in the RAM (step S1004). S6007).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read out in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8001). That is, the display control result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the design symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means by executing the process of step S8001 by the CPU 101 for the effect control. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8001. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the received display result specifying command indicates “normal jackpot” (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 2 specifying command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol. In addition, a symbol reminiscent of being probabilistic (an odd symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol reminiscent of being in a probable state (even symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable symbol. Also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a predetermined display in the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S in the same display mode as the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c of the sub display device 9S ( Active display) is displayed (step S8002). For example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display portion 18c is in the normal mode (black round display in this example), the active display area 9A has a black display as a predetermined display. Display a round display. Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a blue round display, a blue round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . For example, when the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a red round display, a red round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. .

  In this embodiment, the command transmitted at the start of the variation is the interval for each timer interrupt (4 ms interval) in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. ) (See FIGS. 23 to 27). Therefore, in the effect symbol variation start process executed at the stage of receiving up to the display result designation command, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been received yet, and in the stage of step S8002, the pending display is not yet shifted and is added up. The hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started this time should still remain in the hold storage display unit 18c. Therefore, in step S8002, the first hold display (hold display corresponding to the variable display started this time) displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is confirmed, and the active display is displayed in the same display mode. You are in control.

  In step S8002, after a predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the active display area 9A, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received at the next timer interrupt (after 4 ms), and 1 is added from the total pending storage display unit 18c. Since the first hold display is erased, when viewed from the player, it appears that the first hold display of the combined hold storage display portion 18c has shifted to the active display area 9A almost simultaneously.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag is set (step S8003). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the hold change notice effect determination flag (step S8004). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the hold change notice effect stored in the hold change notice effect storage area (see step S6007) provided in the RAM, and according to the variation pattern and the type of the hold change notice effect. The selected process table is selected (step S8005).

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the active display displayed in step S8002 is the normal mode (step S8006). If it is not the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S8011. That is, the fact that the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (that is, the special display mode (blue or red round display)) means that the pending change notice effect has already been executed for the variable display to be started this time. Therefore, the processing of steps S8007 to S8010, which will be described later, is not executed, and control is performed so that the active display change notice effect described later is not repeatedly executed.

  In addition, for example, the hold display can be changed a plurality of times (for example, from the black round display in the normal mode to the blue round display at the first time and the red round display at the second time can be changed). In such a case, even if it is not the normal mode in step S8006, if it is not the final display mode (for example, blue round display), a display mode that can be further changed remains. Therefore, the process may proceed to step S8007 and subsequent steps so that the active display change notice effect can be executed.

  If the display mode of the active display is the normal mode (that is, black round display), the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the active display change notice effect based on the variation pattern command read in step S8000. (Step S8007). In step S8007, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the active display change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the active display change notice effect, and the active display change notice effect. Determine the presence and type.

  The “active display change notice effect” is an effect that changes the active display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, black round display). is there. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect is executed, the display of the active display is started in the normal mode at the start of the change, and then the action effect (the effect effect A and the effect effect B) during the change display. Is executed, and the effect that the active display changes to any one of the special display modes is executed (therefore, in this embodiment, the active display change notice effect includes at least a part for executing the effect effect and the active display). Both with changing parts).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the active display change notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the active display change notice effect determination table for the active display change notice effect 1 to 6 without the active display change notice effect. . As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, there are six types of active display change notice effects 1 to 6 as active display change notice effects.

  The active display change notice effect 1 is an active display change notice effect that does not change the display mode of the active display in the normal mode (in this example, black round display) only by executing the action effect A. The active display change notice effect 2 is an active display change notice effect that does not change the display mode of the active display in the normal mode (in this example, black round display) only by executing the action effect B. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect 1 or the active display change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed. Since the mode does not change, it corresponds to the so-called active display change notice effect of gasses.

  The active display change notice effect 3 is an active display change notice effect that executes the action effect A and changes the display mode of the active display to a blue round display. The active display change notice effect 4 is an active display change notice effect that executes the action effect B and changes the display mode of the active display to a blue round display. The active display change notice effect 5 is an active display change notice effect that executes the action effect A and changes the display mode of the active display to a red round display. The active display change notice effect 6 is an active display change notice effect that executes the action effect B and changes the display mode of the active display to a red round display.

  In this embodiment, the active display change notice effect is an effect that can change the display mode of the active display using the sub display device 9S (in this example, the active display change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the active display change effect). The notice display effect 3 and the active display change notice effect 5. Hereinafter, the display form of the active display can be changed according to the form in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are interlocked with each other. (In this example, the active display change notice effect 2 with the action effect B, the active display change notice effect 4, and the active display change notice effect 6. Hereinafter, also referred to as a second active display change notice effect) However, as shown in FIG. 41, in the case of a big hit (that is, a fluctuation pattern for designating a fluctuation pattern for the big hit. When receiving the command), the proportion of relatively second active display change announcement attraction is performed is higher than the percentage of the first active display change announcement attraction is performed. As shown in FIG. 41, when non-reach shift or super-reach shift occurs (that is, when a change pattern command specifying a change pattern with non-reach or a change pattern with reach is received), The ratio at which the second active display change notice effect is executed is lower than the ratio at which the first active display change notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the active display is changed after the second active display change notice effect is executed, the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Compared to the case, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher.

  Further, in this embodiment, there are a case where the active display changes to a blue round display and a case where the active display changes to a red round display as a change mode of the display mode of the active display. As shown in FIG. 5, when the first active display change notice effect is executed, the ratio of changing to the blue round display is relatively higher than the ratio of changing to the red round display. Also, as shown in FIG. 41, when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the ratio of changing to the red round display is relatively higher than the ratio of changing to the blue round display. ing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the active display is a blue round display depending on whether the first active display change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes. And the display mode of the red round display are different.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the active display does not change even when the active display change notice effect is executed (that is, the active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 1, active display change notice effect) 2). Also, as shown in FIG. 41, the proportion of execution of the first active display change notice effect of the gusset (in this example, the active display change notice effect 1) is the second active display change notice effect of the gusset (this book In the example, it is higher than the rate at which the active display change notice effect 2) is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes varies depending on whether the first active display change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the second active display change notice effect of Gasse (in this example, the active display change notice effect 2) is more active than the first active display change notice effect of Gase (in this example, active Since the execution rate is lower than that of the display change notice effect 1), the active display is relatively more effective when the second active display change notice effect is executed than when the first active display change notice effect is executed. The rate of change is high. In addition, not only in the aspect shown in this embodiment, on the contrary, the case where the first active display change notice effect is executed is more active than the case where the second active display change notice effect is executed. You may comprise so that the ratio which a display changes may become high.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the action effect B is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the action effect A is executed, or so-called active display of gasses is performed. Although the case where the degree of advantage is high, such as when the rate of change notice effect is small, is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when the effect effect B is executed, the advantage degree may be lower than when the effect effect A is executed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the change mode of the hold display and the active display is the same for the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect (both change to a blue or red round display) is shown. The change mode may be different. For example, in the hold change notice effect, the character is changed to a character hold display that imitates the shape of a character (or a character image is added), while in the active display change notice effect, the shape of the active display is left as it is. The display color of the active display may be changed. In this case, for example, if the character hold display A of the character A is displayed as the hold display in the normal mode, and the change change notice effect is executed and the character change to the character hold display B of the character B, the character hold display A is more reliable. The degree of reliability may be highest when the degree is increased, and the change to the character hold display C of the character C is performed when the hold change notice effect is executed. In addition, for example, if a black round display is displayed as the active display in the normal mode, and the active display change notice effect is executed and the active display changes to a blue round display, the active display in the normal mode is more reliable than the active display in the normal mode. If the active display change notice effect is executed and the active display changes to a red round display, the reliability may be highest.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of action effect performed by the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect is shown in both the action effect A and the action effect B, such a case is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the action effect C is further provided as a type of action effect that can be executed in the active display change notice effect (that is, the action effect C can be executed only in the active display change notice effect), and the action effect C is executed. It may be configured so that it can be recognized that it acts on the active display.

  Or, conversely, for example, an action effect C is provided as a type of action effect that can be executed in the hold change notice effect (that is, only the hold change notice effect can be executed), and the action effect C is executed. It may be configured so that it can be recognized that it acts on the hold display at the time of being performed.

  Further, for example, the action effect C is provided as the type of action effect that can be executed in the hold change notice effect, and the action effect D is provided as the type of action effect that can be executed in the active display change notice effect. If it is done, it can be recognized that it acts on the hold display, and if the action effect D is executed, it can be recognized that it acts on the active display. Also good.

  Also, there are various possible ways of assigning the determination values in the pending change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 37 and the active display change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. For example, in the hold change notice effect determination table and the active display change notice effect determination table, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect depend on whether the action effect A or the action effect B is executed. The determination value may be allocated so that the ratio of which one is executed (whether it acts on the hold display or the active display) is different. Further, for example, the ratio of whether or not the hold display or the active display changes depending on whether the action effect A or the action effect B is executed (that is, whether or not the effect is a so-called “gase effect”). The determination values may be assigned so as to be different, or to change the ratio of which change mode (that is, which of blue and red round display is used).

  If the execution of the active display notice effect is determined (Y in step S8008), the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the active display change notice effect determined in step S8007 (in this example, the active display change notice effect 1). To 6) are stored in the active display change notice effect storage area provided in the RAM (step S8009). Further, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the type of the variation pattern and the active display change notice effect (step S8010).

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode in step S8006 or if the execution of the active display change effect is not determined in step S8008, the effect control CPU 101 performs a normal operation according to the variation pattern. A process table (a process table without a pending change notice effect and an active display change notice effect) is selected (step S8011).

  In this embodiment, when execution of the hold change notice effect is determined and the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, the processes of steps S8004 and S8005 are executed, and the processes of steps S8006 to S8010 are executed. Only when the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the processes of steps S8006 to S8010 are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are not executed redundantly in one variable display. By configuring in this way, in this embodiment, it is prevented that the effect effect is executed redundantly in one variable display and the effect becomes troublesome.

  It should be noted that both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect may be executed in one variable display. In this case, for example, when both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are determined, one action effect is executed to change the display mode of both the hold display and the active display of the notice object. It may be. Further, it may be configured to execute the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect while shifting the execution timing during one variable display.

  In this embodiment, if the execution of the hold change notice effect is determined by executing the process of step S8003, the hold change notice effect is uniformly given priority over the active display change notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, the active display change notice effect may be executed with priority over the hold change notice effect. In addition, specify which of the hold display and the active display to be predicted is higher in expectation (for example, the display color changes to a higher expectation), and change the hold with priority on the higher expectation You may comprise so that a notice effect or an active display change notice effect may be performed.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8005, S8010, and S8011 (step S8012).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 42 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, a notice effect other than the pre-reading notice effect (in this example, the hold change notice effect) may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol. When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the decided notice effect in steps S8005, S8010, and S8011.

  In addition, the production control CPU 101 performs the production devices (the production display device 9 and the sub display device 9S as production components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps as a production component and the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S8013). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8014).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts the command (design designation command, variable category command, start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second command) stored in the storage area of the start prize command storage area. One of the start winning commands stored in the first storage area is deleted, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. (Step S8015).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8016).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the action effect A (that is, the hold change notice effect 1, the hold change notice effect 3, the hold change notice effect 5, the active display change notice effect 1, the active display change notice effect 3, Or, when the active display change notice effect 5 is executed), it is checked whether or not the start timing of the action effect A (for example, 1 second after the start of change) is reached (step S8106). Whether or not it is the start timing of the action effect A can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step S8014. If it is the start timing of the action effect A, the effect control CPU 101 starts effect display of the action effect A using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (step S8107).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect A is to be executed, and whether or not the action effect A has ended (for example, 6 seconds after the start of variation) (step S8108). Whether or not it is the end timing of the action effect A can be specifically determined by confirming the value of the variable time timer set in step S8014. If it is the end timing of the action effect A, the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect display of the action effect A using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (step S8109). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed (step S8110). If the display mode of the hold display or the active display is to be changed, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified to the determined display mode (step S8111).

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 checks the type of the hold change notice effect stored in the hold change notice effect storage area (see step S6007) provided in the RAM, and if the hold change notice effect 3 is stored. If the hold display for the advance notice is changed to a blue round display and the hold change notice effect 5 is stored, the hold display for the advance notice is changed to a red round display. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the active display change notice effect stored in the active display change notice effect storage area (see step S8009) provided in the RAM, and the active display change notice effect 3 is displayed. If it is stored, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect 5 is stored, the active display is changed to a red round display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the action effect B (that is, the hold change notice effect 2, the hold change notice effect 4, the hold change notice effect 6, the active display change notice effect 2, the active display change notice effect 4, Or, when the active display change notice effect 6 is executed), it is confirmed whether or not it is the start timing of the effect effect B (for example, 1 second after the start of change) (step S8112). Whether or not it is the start timing of the action effect B can be specifically determined by confirming the value of the variable time timer set in step S8014. If it is the start timing of the action effect B, the effect control CPU 101 starts effect display of the action effect B using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) ( Step S8113).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect B is to be executed, and whether or not the action effect B has ended (for example, 6 seconds after the start of variation) (step S8114). Whether or not it is the end timing of the action effect B can be specifically determined by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step S8014. If it is the end timing of the action effect B, the effect control CPU 101 ends the effect display of the action effect B using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) ( Step S8115). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed (step S8116). If the display mode of the hold display or the active display is to be changed, the CPU 101 for effect control changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified to the determined display mode (step S8117).

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the hold change notice effect stored in the hold change notice effect storage area (see step S6007) provided in the RAM, and if the hold change notice effect 4 is stored. If the hold display for the advance notice is changed to a blue round display and the hold change notice effect 6 is stored, the hold display for the advance notice is changed to a red round display. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the active display change notice effect stored in the active display change notice effect storage area (see step S8009) provided in the RAM, and the active display change notice effect 4 is displayed. If stored, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect 6 is stored, the active display is changed to a red round display.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8118), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8119).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs control to erase the active display displayed in the active display area 9A (step S8300). In this embodiment, the active display is erased every time when the variable display is finished. However, when the variable display is finished, at least one hold display is displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c. If so, the active display area 9A may be configured to continuously display the active display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8308. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8307. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8305 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8308.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8305).

  Next, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S 8305 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S 8306), the presentation control CPU 101 proceeds to step S 8314. To do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8305 (Y in step S8306), the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S8307).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received (step S8308). Whether or not any jackpot start designation command has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (a jackpot start designation command reception flag), This determination can be made by checking whether or not a flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. If any jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8309), and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S8310). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8311), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part, various lamps as an effect part, and the speaker 27 as an effect part) is executed according to data 1 and movable member control data 1) (step S8312). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8313).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8306), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag in accordance with the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). The value is updated (step S8314).

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the pending change notice effect will be described. FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the production mode of the pending change notice effect. Among these, FIG. 45 shows a specific example of the production mode of the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5). FIG. 46 shows a specific example of the production mode of the second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6). 45 and 46, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, using FIG. 45, an effect aspect of the first pending change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the variation display of the middle left and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) performs active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the number of hold indications is increased by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c to be three. Further, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first hold change notice effect based on the occurrence of a new start winning (see step S6004). In the example shown in FIG. 45, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 45 (3), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 45 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved memory.

  Next, when the start timing of the action effect A is reached (for example, 1 second after the start of change), the action effect A is started in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) as shown in FIG. 45 (4) (step S8107). reference). In this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (4), as the effect effect A, the arrow 200 flies toward the active display area 9A and the summed pending storage display unit 18c in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). Various effects are executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (5), in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, an effect is produced in such a manner that the arrow 200 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of change), as shown in FIG. 45 (6), the effect A is ended in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (see step S8109). ), The display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed (see step S8111). For example, if the hold change notice effect 3 is executed, the hold display to be notified in FIG. 45 (6) is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect 5 is executed, In 45 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the case where the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is executed as the first hold change notice effect is shown. 45 (4) and (5), only the effect A is executed. In FIG. 45 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, the black round display). It will not (so-called Gase's first pending change notice effect). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 45 may be performed so that the arrow does not hit by warping the hold display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an effect aspect of the second reserved change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the variation display of the middle left and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) performs active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated, and the number of on-hold displays is increased by one in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c to three. Further, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the second hold change notice effect based on the occurrence of a new start prize (see step S6004). In the example shown in FIG. 46, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 46 (3), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 46 (4). In addition, as shown in FIG. 46 (4), it is assumed that as a result of digesting one hold memory, the hold display is reduced by one in the total hold memory display unit 18c to two.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, one second after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 46 (4), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) The used effect presentation B is started (see step S8113). In this example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4), as the action effect B, the effect display is directed toward the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the summed hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 201 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), the arrow 201 travels from the effect display device 9 (men display device) to the sub display device 9S (sub display device), and the sub display device 9S (sub display). In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the device, an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 201 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 46 (6), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are displayed. The used effect B is terminated (see step S8115), and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed (see step S8117). For example, if the hold change notice effect 4 is executed, the notice target hold display in FIG. 46 (6) is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect 6 is executed, In 46 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, the case where the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6 is executed as the second hold change notice effect is shown. 46 (4) and (5), only the effect effect B is executed. In FIG. 46 (6), the hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, the black round display). No (this is the so-called second hold change notice effect of Gase). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 46 may be performed so that the arrow does not hit due to warping the hold display.

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the active display change notice effect will be described. 47 and 48 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode of the active display change notice effect. Among these, FIG. 47 shows a specific example of the production mode of the first active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 1, active display change notice effect 3, active display change notice effect 5). FIG. 48 shows a specific example of the production mode of the second active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 2, active display change notice effect 4, active display change notice effect 6). 47 and 48, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, using FIG. 47, an effect aspect of the first active display change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 47 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the variation display of the left middle right effect symbol, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and three hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, three hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). In particular, it is assumed that the pending change notice effect has not been determined. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 47 (2), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 47 (3). Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (3), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two as a result of digesting one reserved memory.

  Further, it is assumed that the first active display change notice effect is determined to be executed at the start of the change based on the fact that the pending change notice effect is not determined (see step S8007). In the example shown in FIG. 47, it is assumed that the active display change notice effect 3 or the active display change notice effect 5 is decided to be executed.

  Next, when the start timing of the effect A is reached (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation), the effect A is started in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) as shown in FIG. 47 (3) (step S8107). reference). In this example, as shown in FIG. 47 (3), as the effect effect A, the arrow 202 flies in the direction of the active display area 9A and the summed pending storage display unit 18c in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). Various effects are executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (4), the combined hold storage display unit 18c performs an effect in a manner that the arrow 202 hits the active display in the active display area 9A.

  Then, at the end timing of the effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 47 (5), the effect A is ended in the sub display device 9S (sub display device) (see step S8109). ), The display mode of the active display is changed (see step S8111). For example, if the active display change notice effect 3 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display in FIG. 47 (5), and if the active display change notice effect 5 is executed, FIG. In (5), the active display is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, the case where the active display change notice effect 3 or the active display change notice effect 5 is executed as the first active display change notice effect is shown. However, the active display change notice effect 1 is executed. In this case, only the effect A is executed in the same manner as in FIGS. 47 (3) and 47 (4). In FIG. 47 (5), the active display is the normal mode (in this example, the black round display). ) Without change (becomes the first active display change notice effect of so-called gasses). In this case, for example, an effect may be executed such that the arrow does not hit due to warping the active display, although the effect is such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, in this embodiment, when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, an effect effect is produced in the same effect form. A is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the action effect A is started during the variable display, the first hold change notice effect is displayed until the arrow hits the hold display or active display to be notified and the display mode changes. It cannot be immediately recognized which one of the first active display change notice effects is being executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 47, there is shown a case where the effect mode A has one type of effect, but the configuration is such that a plurality of types of effect A can be performed. May be. For example, a plurality of types of action effects A (an action effect A in a mode in which a blue arrow flies and an effect in a mode in which a red arrow flies are different) The degree of expectation (may be a big hit expectation degree, a probability variation big hit expectation degree, a reach expectation degree, a pseudo-continuous expectation degree, etc.) differs depending on which type of the action effect A is executed. You may comprise as follows. In this case, for example, when the action effect A in which the red arrow is flying is executed, the degree of expectation is higher than when the action effect A is executed in which the blue arrow is flying. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, the effect form of the second active display change notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 48 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the middle-right effect symbol variation display, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and three hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, three hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). In particular, it is assumed that the pending change notice effect has not been determined. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 48 (2), one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 48 (3). Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (3), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved storage.

  Further, it is assumed that the second active display change notice effect is decided to be executed at the start of the change based on the fact that the pending change notice effect is not decided (see step S8007). In the example shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that the active display change notice effect 4 or the active display change notice effect 6 is decided to be executed.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, 1 second after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 48 (3), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are displayed. The used action effect B is started (see step S8113). In this example, as shown in FIG. 48 (3), as the effect effect B, the effect display is directed toward the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the summed hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 203 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (4), the straw arrow 203 jumps over from the effect display device 9 (men display device) to the sub display device 9S (sub display device), and the sub display device 9S (sub display). In the active display area 9 </ b> A of the apparatus), an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 203 hits the active display.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of change), as shown in FIG. 48 (5), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) The used effect B is terminated (see step S8115), and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed (see step S8117). For example, if the active display change notice effect 4 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display in FIG. 48 (5), and if the active display change notice effect 6 is executed, FIG. In (5), the active display is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 48, the case where the active display change notice effect 4 or the active display change notice effect 6 is executed as the second active display change notice effect is shown. However, the active display change notice effect 2 is executed. 48 (3) and (4), only the effect effect B is executed. In FIG. 48 (5), the active display is the normal mode (in this example, the black round display). ) Without changing (becomes a second active display change notice effect of so-called gasses). In this case, for example, an effect may be executed in which the arrow does not hit due to warping the active display, although the effect is such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 48, in this embodiment, the effect effect is produced in the same effect manner when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed. B is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the action effect B is started during the variable display, the second hold change notice effect is displayed until the display mode changes after the arrow hits the hold display or active display to be notified. Which of the second active display change notice effects is being executed cannot be immediately recognized.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 48, there is shown a case where the effect mode of the effect effect B is one type, but the effect effect B of a plurality of types of effect modes can be executed. May be. For example, a plurality of types of effect effects B (the effect effect B in which the blue arrow is flying and the effect of the aspect in which the red arrow is flying) are different in the display colors of the arrows flying toward the hold display and the active display. The expectation level (may be a big hit expectation level, a probable big hit expectation degree, a reach expectation degree, a pseudo-continuous expectation degree, etc.) may differ depending on which type of the action effect B is executed. You may comprise as follows. In this case, for example, the degree of expectation is higher in the case where the action effect B in the form of the red arrow flying is performed than in the case of the action effect B in the aspect of the blue arrow flying. You may comprise as follows.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the effect production (action effect A, the effect effect B) is performed over 5 seconds after 6 seconds from the start of the change was shown, It is not limited to what is shown in the form. For example, the effect presentation may be started at the same time as the start of the change, or the action effect may be executed at a timing during high-speed fluctuation or after the occurrence of reach to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display. Good. Further, the execution timings of the action effect A and the action effect B are not necessarily the same, and may be executed at different timings or over different periods.

  In FIGS. 45 to 48, when the execution of the action effect is started, the display position of the arrow at the start of display is a common position regardless of which hold display or active display is applied. Thus, it is desirable to make it impossible to immediately recognize which hold display or active display is the subject of advance notice. In addition to the display position of the arrow or instead of the display position of the arrow, the display angle of the arrow is made common so that it is impossible to immediately recognize which hold display or active display is the subject of the advance notice. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, for example, after an arrow is displayed at a position or an angle that is likely to fly to a specific hold display (for example, the second hold display), the effect of the arrow changes in the middle. Further, it may be configured such that the action effect can be executed with an irregular pattern in which an arrow hits another hold display (for example, the first hold display).

  Further, for example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is configured to be movable, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is moved to move the arrow (gase hold change notice effect or active display change). (Notification effect), it may be configured to execute an effect effect that makes an arrow appear to hit a different hold display or active display.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the first effect device (in this example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the second effect device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device) Display device)), and can display the hold display using the first effect device corresponding to the hold storage (in this example, the sub display device 9S has the combined hold storage display unit 18c), A change effect capable of changing the display mode (in this example, a pending change notice effect) can be executed. In this case, the first change effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the first effect device (in this example, the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect). 3, hold change notice effect 5)) and the second change effect (in this example, the second hold change notice that can change the display mode of the hold display in a manner in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. Effects (holding change notice effect 2 with action effects B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed. Then, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37, the second hold change notice is shown). When an effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. high). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the corresponding display (in this example, active display) corresponding to the variable display using the first effect device during execution of the variable display (in this example, the secondary display). The display device 9S has an active display area 9A), and a change effect (in this example, an active display change effect) that can change the display mode of the corresponding display can be executed. In this case, a first change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display using the first effect device (in this example, the first active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 1 with action effect A, active display). Change notice effect 3, active display change notice effect 5)) and the second change effect (in this example, the first change effect display mode can be changed in a manner in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. 2 active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 2 with action effect B, active display change notice effect 4, active display change notice effect 6)). The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes (in this example, as shown in FIG. 41, the second active display change When the display mode of the hold display is changed after the notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is compared with the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed after the first active display change notice effect is executed. ) Is high). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to execute both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect as change effects (however, in one variable display, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect overlap). In this case, the control is configured not to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the gaming machine may be configured such that only one of the pending change notice effect and the active display change notice effect can be executed as the change effect (the other effect is not executed at all).

  In addition, for example, when the game state, the production state, and various setting states in the gaming machine are in a specific state, it is configured to execute only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect, In a state different from the specific state, the other effect may be executed. Moreover, in a further different state, you may comprise so that both an on-hold change notice effect and an active display change notice effect can be performed, and various structure aspects can be considered.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the 1st effect device was the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the 2nd effect device was the effect display device 9 (main display device), the 1st effect device was shown. The device and the second effect device are not limited to such a liquid crystal display device. For example, the first effect device or the second effect device may be configured with a movable member (effect effect) that can move. Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device may be configured to be movable, and the first effect device and the second effect device may be configured by the liquid crystal display device configured to be movable. Furthermore, not only a liquid crystal display device and a movable member (production effect), but also a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, or a sound output device such as a speaker may be used as the effect device.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where two effect devices, that is, the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are used has been described. You may comprise so that a pending | holding change notice effect and an active display change notice effect can be performed using a production | presentation apparatus.

  As an example using three effect devices, for example, an effect effect may be executed using three liquid crystal display devices. In this case, for example, the first liquid crystal display device is configured to be movable, and an arrow is displayed while the first liquid crystal display device is movable, and the arrow passes through the main display device to display the sub display. You may comprise so that an effect effect may be performed in the aspect which flies toward the active display and hold display of an apparatus.

  Further, for example, as the three effect devices, an effect effect may be configured to be executable using a liquid crystal display device, an LED, and an effect accessory. In this case, for example, when the stage effect is movable, the LEDs emit light sequentially from the LED located in the vicinity of the moved stage effect, and when the light reaches the LED located in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device, You may comprise so that an effect presentation may be performed in the aspect from which the display mode of the active display on a display screen of a liquid crystal display device or a hold display changes.

  In addition, when the action effect is configured to be executable using three or more effect devices as described above, the degree of advantage increases as the effect effect is executed in conjunction with a larger number of effect devices (for example, It may be configured such that the ratio of producing the effect is reduced or changes to an advantageous change mode). On the contrary, you may comprise so that an advantage degree may become low as a larger number of production | presentation apparatuses interlock | cooperate and an effect production is performed.

  In this embodiment, “the second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked” refers to the first effect device and the second effect. The second change effect is executed by the device acting in some manner. For example, “a second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by a mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are interlocked” refers to the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. 46 and 48. On the display screen of (main display device), an image such as an arrow is displayed so as to fly toward the sub display device 9S (sub display device) that displays the hold display and the active display. An effect display that affects the display may be performed. In addition, for example, in the case where it is configured so as to include an effect item instead of the main display device, the effect item moves so as to move toward the hold display or the active display so that it acts by a physical operation. It may be shown.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of display modes in which the hold display can be changed (in this example, a blue round display and a red round display), and the first change effect or the second change effect is displayed. Depending on which is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the ratio of the display mode of the hold display is changed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37, the first hold change notice Depending on whether the display or the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is either a blue round display or a red round display. The rate of change to Therefore, since the change mode varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of display modes in which the correspondence display can be changed (in this example, a blue round display and a red round display), and the first change effect or the second change effect is displayed. Depending on which is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display is changed, the ratio of the display mode of the corresponding display changes (in this example, as shown in FIG. 41, the first active display change Depending on whether the notice display effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display form of the active display is changed, the active display is changed to a blue round display or a red round display. The rate of change is different). Therefore, since the change mode varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, even when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change (in this example, the hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1, the hold change notice effect 2) ), And the rate of change of the display mode of the hold display varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 37). In addition, when the second hold change notice effect is executed relatively, the ratio of change of the hold display of the notice object is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed). Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the display mode of the corresponding display does not change even when the change effect is executed (in this example, the active display change notice effect (active display change notice effect 1, active display change notice) The ratio at which the display mode of the corresponding display changes varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed (in this example, FIG. 41). As shown in FIG. 4, the ratio of the active display change is higher when the second active display change notice effect is executed than when the first active display change notice effect is executed. Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the corresponding display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in which change effect is executed.

  Also, according to this embodiment, when the second change effect is executed and the display mode is changed, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first change effect is executed and the display mode is changed. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than the case where the change has occurred, and, as shown in Fig. 41, when the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved by executing the second change effect.

  In this embodiment, when the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the first hold change notice effect or the first active change effect is displayed. Compared with the case where the display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, conversely, when the first hold change notice effect or the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice You may comprise so that the expectation degree (reliability) with respect to a jackpot may become high compared with the case where a production | presentation is performed and the display mode of a hold display or an active display changes.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the second hit change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed shows a case where the big hit expectation is higher. However, it is not limited to the jackpot expectation degree, and, for example, the expectation degree for the probable big hit, the reach expectation degree, and the expectation degree for the occurrence of the pseudo-ream may be increased. In addition, for example, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the hold display or active display changes, and when there are a plurality of types of change modes, the degree of expectation as to whether the hold display or active display changes will be increased. May be.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the second effect device is a main display device (in this example, an effect display device 9 (main display device)), and the first effect device is an auxiliary display device (in this example). Sub display device 9S (sub display device). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by using the main display device and the sub display device.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a common change effect when changing the display mode of the hold display and when changing the display mode of the corresponding display (in this example, FIGS. 45 and 47). As shown in Fig. 46, the action effect A is executed in the same effect manner when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 4, the effect effect B is executed in the same effect manner when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed. Since the destination where the arrow hits differs depending on whether the hold display or active display is the subject of the advance notice, a part of the effect is common.) Therefore, it can be noted which of the hold display and the corresponding display changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the second hold change notice effect is executed. And the action effect B executed in the second active display change notice effect are shown in the same effect mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and only one of them is the same mode. You may comprise so that it may be performed by. For example, when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect A is executed in the same effect mode, while the second hold change notice effect is executed. And the second active display change notice effect may be configured to execute an effect effect B having a different effect mode. On the other hand, for example, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect B is executed in the same effect manner, while the first hold change notice is executed. You may comprise so that the effect production A of the production aspect different in the case where an effect may be performed and a 1st active display change notice effect may be performed.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that is performed using the entire display screen of the effect display device 9 (main display device) or makes the display screen black. It may be configured. In such a configuration, if a predetermined effect is to be executed, if the action effect B performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executed, the predetermined effect is hindered. Therefore, the execution of the second pending change notice effect with the action effect B and the second active display change notice effect may be limited. Hereinafter, a second embodiment that restricts execution of the second pending change notice effect and the second active display change notice effect will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, as a predetermined effect, a blackout effect is executed in which the display screen of the effect display device 9 (main display device) is in a completely black state during the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 39, the blackout effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the blackout effect is executed, and the blackout effect is determined to be executed. In this case, the process table corresponding to the blackout effect is selected in steps S8005, S8010, and S8011, and steps S8013 and S8105 are executed, so that the blackout effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbols. .

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the processing during effect symbol variation (step S802) according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S8101 to S8111 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation process, before the determination process in step S8112, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the blackout effect is executed in the variation display being executed (step S8111X). ). Whether or not the blackout effect is executed is determined by, for example, a flag indicating that the blackout effect is executed when the execution of the blackout effect is determined in the blackout effect setting process of the effect symbol variation start process. In step S8111X, it may be determined whether or not the flag is set.

  If the blackout effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S8112. If the blackout effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds directly to step S8118 without executing the processes of steps S8112 to S8117. That is, if a blackout effect is to be executed, control is performed so that the second hold change notice effect and the second active display change notice effect with the action effect B are not executed. Note that the processes in steps S8112 to S8119 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when executing the blackout effect, the second hold change notice effect and the second active display change notice effect with the action effect B are completely prohibited. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, instead of the action effect B, the action effect A may be executed to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display. Further, for example, the action effect B may be executed in a conservative manner that does not interfere with the blackout effect to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display. Further, even during the same fluctuation, the execution timings may be shifted from each other so that the execution timings of the action effect B and the blackout effect do not overlap. Furthermore, the production data such as the process table may be designed so that the execution timing does not overlap with the original production effect B and the blackout effect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect (in this example, a blackout effect) is executed using the second effect device, execution of the second change effect is limited. (In this example, the second hold change notice effect and the second active display change notice effect with the action effect B are not executed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of the predetermined effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the predetermined effect is the blackout effect is shown. However, the predetermined effect is not limited to the blackout effect. For example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 (main display device) is used. Other effects performed using the whole of may be used. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect or the pre-reading zone effect is performed using the entire display screen, the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is made with the prefetching notice effect or the prefetch zone effect as a predetermined effect. May be restricted. In addition, even if the announcement effect executed during the variable display or the effect during the big hit game is to be performed using the entire display screen, the second pending change notice effect or The execution of the second active display change notice effect may be limited.

  Further, in this embodiment, “restrict the execution of the second change effect” means that the second change effect (in this example, the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect) is completely prohibited. To perform other substitute effects that do not interfere with the specified performance, or to shift the execution timing so as not to interfere with the specified performance. It is a concept that includes reducing

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, a predetermined reliability notification may be executed using the main display device and the sub display device. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which a predetermined reliability notification is performed using the main display device and the sub display device will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the image display device corresponds to the effect display device 9 (main display device) shown in the first embodiment, and the sub-image display device is shown in the first embodiment. This corresponds to the sub display device 9S (sub display device).

  In addition, the super reach production in this embodiment includes a super reach title notification period that is the beginning of the super reach production and informs the type (title) of the super reach production, and a content display period that displays the contents of the super reach production. In the super reach title notification period after the start of the super reach production, reliability notification indicating the big hit expectation is executed on the image display device, and in the content display period after the super reach title notification period elapses The reliability notification is executed to the sub-image display device. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing failure and non-display by performing reliability notification on the same display device while displaying a high quality image. In this embodiment, an example in which the jackpot expectation degree is notified by the number of stars is shown as the reliability notification (for example, FIG. 51), but is not limited to this. You may alert | report by. In addition, the reliability notification executed by the sub-image display device during the content display period is performed in a manner smaller than the reliability notification executed by the image display device during the super reach title notification period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display is started, whether or not to perform reliability notification is determined in a process corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (see step S801) shown in the first embodiment. When it is determined to execute, a reliability notification execution setting process is performed for performing reliability notification to the image display device in the super reach title notification period and performing setting of performing reliability notification to the sub-image display device in the content display period. Do. Then, according to the setting content in the reliability notification execution setting process, the reliability notification is executed using the image display device or the sub-image display device during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect process in the third embodiment. The variable display effect process is a process corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (see step S802) shown in the first embodiment. In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S551). ). As an example, in the process of step S551, when the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction) and an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not it is a reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S552). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern selected according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S552 that it is the reach production execution period (step S552; Yes), it is determined by checking the reach production start flag whether or not the reach production has been started (step S553). . The reach effect start flag may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM, for example. When it is determined that the reach effect has not been started (step S553; No), for example, the effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed based on the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern (step S554). . Then, the reach production start flag is set to the on state (step S555). After performing the process of step S555, or when it is determined in step S553 that the reach effect has been started (step S553; Yes), it is determined whether it is the reliability notification period (step S556). The reliability notification period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern, and may be a total period of the super reach title notification period and the content display period, for example.

  When it is determined that it is the reliability notification period (step S556; Yes), it is determined by checking the image display device reliability display flag whether or not the reliability has been displayed on the image display device (step S556). S557). The image display device reliability display flag may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM, for example. When it is determined that the reliability has not been displayed on the image display device (step S557; No), the reliability is displayed on the image display device (reliability notification is executed) (step S558). Then, the image display device reliability display flag is set to the on state (step S559). After executing the process of step S559 or when it is determined in step S557 that the reliability has been displayed on the image display device (step S557; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S560). ). In this embodiment, in the process of step S560, it is determined by checking a predetermined timer whether or not the super reach title notification period has elapsed. When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (step S560; Yes), it is determined by checking the sub-image display device reliability display flag whether or not the reliability has been displayed on the sub-image display device (step S560). S561). The sub-image display device reliability display flag may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM, for example. When it is determined that the reliability has not been displayed on the sub-image display device (step S560; No), the reliability display of the image display device is deleted and the reliability is displayed on the sub-image display device (reliability notification is executed). (Step S562). Then, the sub-image display device reliability display flag is set to the on state (step S563).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S552 that it is not the reach production execution period (step S552; No), for example, various types such as a reach production start flag, an image display device reliability display flag, and a sub image display device reliability display flag. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step S564). If the flag is on (step S564; Yes), various flags are cleared (step S565). In the process of step S564, when it is determined that the sub image display device reliability display flag is on, the reliability display of the sub image display device is deleted.

  If it is determined in step S556 that it is not the reliability notification period (step S556; No), or if it is determined in step S560 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S560; No), in step S561, the sub image display device is displayed. When it is determined that the reliability has been displayed (step S561; Yes), when the process of step S563 is executed, or when the process of step S565 is executed, for example, the effect control selected corresponding to the variation pattern Based on the setting in the pattern and the like, after performing the presentation operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative symbols (step S566), the presentation process during variable display is ended.

  By repeatedly performing the effect control process, the reliability notification is executed during the reach effect of super reach.

  Next, an example of the main effect operation when the reliability notification is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device and the sub-image display device according to the third embodiment. First, when the reach effect of super reach A is executed, reliability notification is executed on the image display device in the super reach title notification period, as shown in FIG. Then, when a predetermined time (super reach title notification period) elapses, a content display period starts, and reliability notification is executed on the sub-image display device as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the reliability notification is executed to the sub-image display device until the reach effect ends, and when the reach effect period ends, the reliability notification disappears as shown in FIG. 51 (d). The finalized decorative symbol is displayed. In the example shown in the figure, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), after the reach effect is ended by performing a display suggesting that it is a “big hit” such as “win”, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). In FIG. 51C, a case where a confirmed decorative symbol is displayed is shown. In the state of FIG. 51C, an example in which the reliability notification is performed by the sub-image display device is shown. The reliability notification may be deleted before the display suggesting that it is a “big hit” (before the suggestion display in the case of “missing”). Even if it is not a “hit”, if the reliability notification with a high degree of expectation for the big hit is performed, the player will feel uncomfortable, and the gaming interest will be reduced. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by erasing the reliability notification before the display suggesting that it is “big hit” or “out of play”. In this case, the timing for deleting the reliability notification may be set in advance by a timer, and may be deleted in accordance with the timer value after the process of step S563. Further, the display of the confirmed decorative pattern may be included in the reach effect such that the finalized decorative symbol is displayed at the end of the reach effect of the super reach. In this case, the reliability notification may be deleted before the display of the confirmed decorative symbol, or the reliability notification may be performed even during the display of the fixed decorative symbol.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 performs reliability notification for displaying the reliability on the image display device in the process of step S558 shown in FIG. In step S562, the reliability display is deleted from the image display device, and the reliability notification is sent to the sub-image display device. According to this, the reliability notification is executed even during the reach production of the super reach, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest. Moreover, according to this embodiment, since the display area of the image display device is larger than that of the sub-image display device, the effect of the reach effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the reliability notification mode executed by the image display device during the super reach title notification period is a larger mode than the reliability notification mode executed by the sub-image display device during the content display period, The reliability notification according to the progress of the game can be executed, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes any one of super reach A to C as the super reach effect, and notifies the type of super reach in addition to the big hit expectation degree in the reliability notification. According to this, the kind of super reach and the reliability can be recognized as a set, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, a light emitting means (LED) is provided at the edge surrounding the display area of the sub display device, and an effect image in which the main display device and the sub display device are related to each other is displayed. You may comprise so that it may display. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a fourth embodiment in which a light emitting means (LED) is provided in a sub display device and an effect image in which the main display device and the sub display device are associated with each other is displayed.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Further, in this embodiment, the main image display device 5 corresponds to the effect display device 9 (main display device) shown in the first embodiment, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are the first embodiment. This corresponds to the sub display device 9S (sub display device) shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect processing corresponding to the effect symbol changing processing (see step S802) shown in the first embodiment, one image is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display. A display with continuity (relevance) is provided by the devices 5a to 5d (one image is divided and displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d). Is displayed with continuity (relevancy) by the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (one image is divided and displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d), and the synchronous display effect processing is executed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the synchronous display effect process in the variable display effect process in the fourth embodiment. In the synchronized display effect process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the synchronized display effect executing flag indicating that the synchronized display effect is being executed is on (step S750). For example, the synchronous display effect executing flag is set in the RAM. In step S750, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the synchronous display effect executing flag set in the RAM is on.

  When it is determined that the synchronous display effect execution flag is off (step S750; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the change pattern designated by the change pattern command from the main board 31 is PA2-3, PA2-5, It is determined whether it is either PA3-3 or PA3-5 (step S751). In this embodiment, PA2-3 is a variation pattern of battle reach B (for loss), and PA2-5 is a variation pattern that develops to battle reach A after battle reach C (non-relief) (for loss). PA3-3 is a variation pattern of battle reach B (for jackpot), and PA3-5 is a variation pattern (for jackpot) that develops to battle reach A after battle reach C (relief).

  When it is determined that the variation pattern is not any of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S751; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the synchronous display effect process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is any one of PA2-3, PA2-5, PA3-3, and PA3-5 (step S751; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 performs synchronous display among the effect control patterns. In performing the effect based on the effect control pattern of the effect, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved (step S752). For example, the effect control CPU 101 generates a drive control signal for moving the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The drive control signal is a combination of pulse power for driving the first stepping motor mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d and pulse power for driving the second stepping motor. The motor drive circuit mounted on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d drives the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, and moves the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. In the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the amount of linear movement increases as the number of pulse powers for driving the first stepping motor increases, and the number of pulse powers for driving the second stepping motor increases. , The amount of rotation increases.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the positions of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d according to the driving of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor (step S754).

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 has the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in the initial positions (positions at the four corners of the main image display device 5), and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. When the number of steps of each of the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor is 0, counting of the number of pulse powers (number of steps) output from the effect control CPU 101 to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is started. . Note that the moving direction of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the first stepping motor is reversed between the case where the pulse power is positive and the case where the pulse power is negative, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d driven by the second stepping motor are reversed. The direction of rotation is reversed. That is, the direction of linear movement and the direction of rotation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are reversed depending on whether the pulse power is positive or negative. In response to this, the CPU 101 for effect control increases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is positive, and decreases the number of steps by 1 when the pulse power is negative.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 refers to, for example, the sub image display device mode table stored in the RAM, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5a are uniquely determined by the number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. The coordinates of the four corners 5d (coordinates in the coordinate system common to the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d) are specified. In the sub image display device mode table, the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are associated every 10 steps. For this reason, if the current number of steps of the first stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor are not an integer multiple of 10 at the timing of executing the process of step S754, the presentation control CPU 101 The coordinates of the four corners of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d are specified according to the number of steps obtained by rounding off the number of steps of the stepping motor and the number of steps of the second stepping motor. Further, the configuration of the sub image display device mode table is not limited to this, and the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d may be associated with each step, or the sub image display device may be associated with each predetermined step. The coordinates of the four corners 5a to 5d may be associated with each other.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays one image on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d based on the positions of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S754. Dividing and assigning (step S755). For example, the main image display device 5 does not move, the coordinates of the four corners of the main image display device 5 are fixed, and the coordinates are stored in the RAM. The effect control CPU 101 uses the main image display device 5 based on the coordinates of the four corners of the main image display device 5 stored in the RAM and the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in step S754. Among the display areas, the display area (superimposition area) on which each of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is superimposed is specified. Further, the effect control CPU 101 assigns one image to the main image display device 5. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 includes an image included in a superimposition region generated by the sub image display device 5a, and an image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display device 5a. Is assigned to the sub-image display device 5a. Similarly, the effect control CPU 101 includes an image included in a superimposition region generated by the sub image display device 5b and an image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display device 5b. Are assigned to the sub-image display device 5b, and are included in the superimposition area generated by the sub-image display device 5c, and the image that protrudes from the main image display device 5 and is sub-image display device 5c. The included image is assigned to the sub-image display device 5c, and the image included in the overlapping region generated by the sub-image display device 5d and the image that protrudes from the main image display device 5 among the one image and is displayed as a sub-image display. The image included in the device 5d is assigned to the sub image display device 5d.

  Here, allocating one image to the main image display device 5 means, for example, that the display position of the image when the one image is displayed on the main image display device 5 in the coordinate system of the main image display device 5. It means to specify by coordinates. In addition, assigning the image included in the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d is one image. Among these, the image of the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and included in the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (hereinafter, the image of the superimposition area and the image protruding from the main image display device 5 and sub The images included in the image display devices 5a to 5d are collectively referred to as “sub-image display device target image”) by the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image, and the display position of the sub-image display device target image Is designated by coordinates in the respective coordinate systems of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the assigned images on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (step S756).

  For example, the effect control CPU 101 outputs, to the VDP 109, display control commands for images to be displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The display control command includes information for specifying one image assigned to the main image display device 5, coordinates in the coordinate system of the main image display device 5 indicating the display position of the one image, and the overlapping region. Information on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image representing the image and the coordinates in the respective coordinate systems of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d indicating the display position of the image of the overlapping region is included. The VDP 109 generates image data corresponding to one image based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 101, and the image data is a coordinate in the coordinate system of the main image display device 5 indicating the display position of the one image. Is output to the main image display device 5. The main image display device 5 displays one image corresponding to the image data input at the display position designated by the coordinates.

  Furthermore, the VDP 109 displays the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a. Image data corresponding to the target image is generated, and the image data is designated with coordinates in the coordinate system of the sub-image display device 5a indicating the display position of the sub-image display device target image to be displayed on the sub-image display device 5a. The data is output to the sub image display device 5a. The sub image display device 5a displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position specified by the coordinates. The display control for the sub image display devices 5b to 5d is the same. That is, the VDP 109 displays the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b. Image data corresponding to the target image is generated, and the image data is designated with coordinates in the coordinate system of the sub-image display device 5b indicating the display position of the sub-image display device target image to be displayed on the sub-image display device 5b. Output to the sub-image display device 5b. The sub image display device 5b displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position designated by the coordinates. The VDP 109 is a sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. The image data corresponding to the sub-image display device 5c is generated, and the image data is designated by specifying the coordinates in the coordinate system of the sub-image display device 5c indicating the display position of the sub-image display device target image to be displayed on the sub-image display device 5c. Output to the display device 5c. The sub image display device 5c displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position specified by the coordinates. The VDP 109 is a sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d based on the coordinates in the coordinate system of one image indicating the display position of the sub image display device target image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d. The image data corresponding to the sub-image display device 5d is generated, and the image data is designated by specifying the coordinates in the coordinate system of the sub-image display device 5d indicating the display position of the sub-image display device target image to be displayed on the sub-image display device 5d Output to the display device 5d. The sub-image display device 5d displays an image corresponding to the image data input at the display position specified by the coordinates.

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the sub image display device mode table, and controls lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d (step S757). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the sub image display device mode table, and turns off the sub corresponding to the coordinates of the four corners of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d specified in the process of step S754. Based on the LEDs arranged at the edge portions 55a to 55d of the image display devices 5a to 5d, the corresponding LEDs are turned off and the other LEDs are turned on. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 restricts the lighting of the LEDs arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d during the execution of the synchronous display effect.

  After executing the process of step S757, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the synchronous display effect executing flag to ON (step S758), and ends the synchronous display effect process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the synchronous display effect execution flag is on (step S750; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has ended (step S760). ). For example, the first stepping motor is driven according to one pulse power that is a drive control signal, and the time during which the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly by a predetermined distance, according to one pulse power that is a drive control signal. The time for which the second stepping motor is driven and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are rotated by a predetermined amount of rotation is fixed. In this case, the presentation control CPU 101 multiplies the predetermined number of pulse power outputs corresponding to the first stepping motor by the time during which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move linearly according to one pulse power. When the time has elapsed and the number of output of pulse power corresponding to the predetermined second stepping motor is multiplied by the time for which the sub image display devices 5a to 5d rotate according to one pulse power, It is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has been completed. Otherwise, it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not been completed.

  When it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has not ended (step S760; No), the effect control CPU 101 advances the process to step S752. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movement of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d has ended (step S760; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the end timing of the synchronous display effect (step S761). For example, the effect control CPU 101 measures the elapsed time from the start of the synchronous display effect, and when the measurement time reaches the time of the synchronous display effect corresponding to the effect control pattern, judge.

  When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the synchronized display effect (step S761; No), the effect control CPU 101 ends the synchronized display effect process. On the other hand, when it determines with it being the completion | finish timing of a synchronous display effect (step S761; Yes), CPU101 for effect control performs completion | finish control of a synchronous display effect (step S762). The effect control CPU 101 sends, for example, a synchronous display effect image output end command to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 controls the display end of one image in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d in response to the output end command. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 outputs an electrical decoration signal for turning off the LEDs arranged at the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the lamp driver substrate 35, and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The illumination of the 5d edge portions 55a to 55d is terminated. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 generates a drive control signal for returning the position of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d to the initial position, and outputs the drive control signal to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The motor drive circuits mounted on the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d drive the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor in accordance with the drive control signal, so that the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d are in the initial state positions. Move.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the synchronous display effect executing flag to OFF (step S763).

  53 to 56 are diagrams showing an example of image display in the synchronous display effect process in the variable display effect process in the fourth embodiment. In the synchronized effect display process, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d move and rotate, and are superimposed on the entire main image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 56 from the state shown in FIG. 53 to the state shown in FIG. It becomes a state. In the mode shown in FIG. 56, the S pole of the magnet of one sub image display device 5a to 5d faces the N pole of the magnet of another sub image display device 5a to 5d that is in contact with one sub image display device 5a. The N poles of the magnets of 5 to 5d are opposite to the S poles of the magnets of the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d that are in contact, and the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d are in contact with the one of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The contact state with is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main image display device target image 551 to be displayed on the main image display device 5 among the one image is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a. The display device target image 551a is displayed on the sub image display device 5a, the sub image display device target image 551b to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b is displayed on the sub image display device 5b, and should be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. The sub image display device target image 551c is displayed on the sub image display device 5c, and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d is displayed on the sub image display device 5d. As a result, the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d have one main image display device target image 551 and sub image display device target images 551a to 551d that are continuous with each other as effect images related to each other. An image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 53, one image includes a character image imitating “crab” (hereinafter referred to as “crab image”) and an object image imitating “crab” and “chestnut” (hereinafter referred to as “crab image”, respectively). ”And“ chestnut image ”), and is divided and displayed on the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. On the main image display device 5, the main part of the crab image is mainly displayed as the main image display device target image 551. The sub image display device 5a mainly displays the right claw portion of the crab image as the sub image display device target image 551a. In the sub image display device 5b, the left nail portion of the crab image is mainly displayed as the sub image display device target image 551b. On the sub-image display device 5c, a cocoon image is mainly displayed as the sub-image display device target image 551c. A chestnut image is mainly displayed as the sub image display device target image 551d on the sub image display device 5d.

  Here, the case where the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display the effect images that are continuous with each other as the effect images associated with each other, for example, as shown in FIG. The line displayed on the device 5 is displayed as a line connected to the sub image display devices 5a to 5d via the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d adjacent to the edge portion of the main image display device 5. Indicates that In addition, when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are continuous with each other, displaying images of the same color or similar colors is also included.

  That is, when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are continuous with each other as effect images that are related to each other, the image that is stored as one image data It shows that a part is displayed on the main image display device 5 and the other part is divided and displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d.

  At this time, of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, a portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5, that is, the main image display device target image 551 and each The LEDs arranged in the part (part of the edge) separating visual continuity from the sub-image display device target images 551a to 551d are turned off. On the other hand, the LEDs arranged other than the portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 are lit. Here, in the edge portions 55a to 55d, the hatched portion indicates that the LED is turned on, and the hatched portion indicates that the LED is turned off.

  Here, the mode of turning on / off the LED will be described more specifically. FIG. 54 shows a mode of turning on / off the LED in the adjacent portion bbb between the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 5b in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, the LEDs 90d5 to 90d9 and 90r7 are visual indicators of the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device target image 551b displayed by the sub image display device 5b. Since it is arranged in a part separating continuity (a part of the edge), it is in a light-off state. On the other hand, the LEDs 90d4 and 90r4 to 90r6 are in a lit state because they are not arranged in a portion that separates the visual continuity between the main image display device target image 551 and the sub image display device target image 551b. In this way, by turning off the LEDs arranged in the portions that separate the visual continuity of the images displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 55a to 55d, the portions are made inconspicuous. A reduction in visibility can be prevented. In order to prevent the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d displayed on the sub image display devices 5a to 5d from being unnaturally interrupted, according to the sub image display device target images 551a to 551d, You may turn off LED arrange | positioned except the part which separates the main image display apparatus object image 551 and visual continuity. For example, the image of the left nail portion of the crab image of the sub-image display device target image 551b displayed on the sub-image display device 5b shown in FIG. 54 does not appear to be unnaturally interrupted by turning on the LEDs 90r5 and 90r6. Alternatively, these may be turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 55, thereafter, the sub image display devices 5 a to 5 d are in a state of being superimposed on a part of the main image display device 5 by moving and rotating. At this time, the sub image display device target image 551a to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a, the sub image display device target image 551b to be displayed on the sub image display device 5b, and the sub image display device to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c. The target image 551c and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d change. It should be noted that sub-image display displayed on each of the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d also in a portion of the display area of the main image display device 5 that is superposed by the sub-image display devices 5a to 5d and hidden on the appearance. The same images as the device target images 551a to 551d may be displayed.

  In addition, with the movement and rotation of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the manner in which the LEDs arranged on the edges 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are turned on and off changes. Of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, a portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5, that is, the main image display device target image 551 and each sub image display. The LEDs arranged in the part (part of the edge) separating the visual continuity from the device target images 551a to 551d are turned off. On the other hand, the LEDs arranged other than the portion that interferes with the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 are lit.

  When the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are further moved and rotated, as shown in FIG. 56, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are superimposed on the entire main image display device 5, that is, adjacent to each other. It becomes a state. In this case, the entire main image display device target image 551 displayed on the main image display device 5 is the sub image display device target image 551a to be displayed on the sub image display device 5a and the sub image display device 5b. The image display device target image 551b, the sub image display device target image 551c to be displayed on the sub image display device 5c, and the sub image display device target image 551d to be displayed on the sub image display device 5d are displayed in association with each other.

  In addition, when the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are adjacent to each other, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are arranged in portions of the edge portions 55a to 55d that do not face the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The LED is turned on, and the LED arranged in the portion facing the other sub image display devices 5a to 5d is turned off.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d execute the synchronous display effect that displays the effect images related to each other. When it does, lighting of LED arrange | positioned at the edge parts 55a-55d of sub image display apparatus 5a-5d is restrict | limited. Thereby, even when the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d execute a synchronous display effect for displaying effect images related to each other, the effect by making the edges 55a to 55d stand out ( It is possible to suppress a decrease in visibility.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are moved by driving the first stepping motor and the second stepping motor, for example. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, a synchronous display effect in which the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d display effect images that are related (continuous) to each other. Among the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, the main image display device target image 551 displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub images displayed by the sub image display devices 5a to 5d. The LEDs arranged in the parts separating visual continuity from the image display device target images 551a to 551d are turned off, and the LEDs arranged in other parts are turned on. Accordingly, the display areas appear to be continuous, and the effect images displayed by the main image display device 5 and the sub image display devices 5a to 5d can be made to appear as if they are an integral image.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, when the sub image display devices 5a to 5d are adjacent to each other, of the edge portions 55a to 55d of the sub image display devices 5a to 5d, The LED arranged in the portion that contacts the other edge portions 55a to 55d is turned on, and the LED arranged in the other portion is turned off. Thereby, the fall of the production effect (visibility) by lighting LED arrange | positioned at edge part 55a-55d of sub image display apparatus 5a-5d can be suppressed.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, the position of the sub display device may be configured to be displaceable, and the display mode of the hold display may be changed in accordance with the displacement of the position of the sub display device. . Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment in which the display mode of the hold display is changed according to the displacement of the position of the sub display device will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the main image display device 9 (also referred to as main liquid crystal) corresponds to the effect display device 9 (main display device) shown in the first embodiment, and the sub image display device 90 (sub-display). (Also referred to as liquid crystal) corresponds to the sub display device 9S (sub display device) shown in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the left rotation pattern holding change effect that rotates the sub image display device 90 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) and the left rotation pattern that rotates the sub image display device 90 clockwise (clockwise). The hold change effect can be executed.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a left rotation pattern hold change effect in the fifth embodiment. The flow of the hold change effect of the left rotation pattern in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57A shows that the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91 to 93 are changing in the main image display device 9. Further, at the bottom of the display screen of the sub-image display device 90, an area for displaying the total number (total pending storage count) that is the sum of the first reserved storage count and the second reserved storage count (total pending storage display section) 18c is provided. A plurality of hold displays H1 to H3 are displayed on the display screen of the sub-image display device 90 in the order of winning in the total hold storage display unit 18c.

  When the hold change effect is executed, the sub image display device 90 rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIG. In accordance with the rotation operation (positional displacement) of the sub-image display device 90, the plurality of hold displays H1 to H3 are displayed in an operation mode that uniformly rolls to the left. At this time, an effect display indicating that the hold display rolls in the display screen according to the gravity in accordance with the displacement of the sub-image display device 90 is performed. Here, the effect means that the displayed image is processed. For example, when the hold display is rolling, it is an image display in which the state of rotation is displayed as a circular arc around the hold display.

  When the sub image display device 90 further rotates counterclockwise from the stage of FIG. 57 (b), an effect is produced in which a plurality of hold displays H1 to H3 collide as shown in FIG. 57 (c). In this case, an effect 60 indicating that the hold display has collided is displayed between the hold display H1 and the hold display H2, and between the hold display H2 and the hold display H3. Then, the display color of the second hold display H1, which is a specific hold display, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c changes from blue to red when the hold display collides. As a result, when the hold display is rolled and operated, the effect 60 indicating that the hold display collides is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the sub-image display device 90 rotates clockwise and returns to the original position. At this time, the hold display that has collided also returns to the original position in accordance with the rotation operation of the sub-image display device 90. In the main image display device 9, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91 to 93 are stopped and displayed with the combination “3, 9, 4” of the stopped symbols. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the hold display H1 is deleted, the hold display H2 and the hold display H3 are moved (shifted) to the left side of the display screen, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (c), since the display mode of the hold display changes in accordance with the displacement caused by the rotation operation of the sub image display device 90, it is clear that the change display effect of the hold display is performed by the hold change effect. can do. Further, since the hold display is displaced by a uniform operation in accordance with the displacement due to the rotation operation of the sub image display device 90, the player can be focused on the movement of the hold display, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the plurality of on-hold displays H1 to H3 are indicated by a display that rolls according to gravity in a uniform operation mode according to the displacement of the sub-image display device 90, so that a plurality of players are displayed. You can pay attention to the movement of the hold display. Further, when a plurality of hold displays perform a uniform operation, the second hold display H2, which is a specific hold display, changes to a special display mode as shown in FIG. 57 (c). Therefore, when a plurality of hold displays are displaced in a uniform operation mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which hold display changes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the hold display is rolled and operated, the effect 60 indicating that the hold display has been collided is displayed and the uniform operation mode is displayed. The entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect produced by the corresponding effect 60.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process (see step S801) shown in the first embodiment, a process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, determination of the type of result effect, etc.) The effect setting process is performed.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 58 shows a process related to the pending change effect among the processes related to the setting of various effects included in the effect setting process. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 sets various effects to be executed in the hold change effect by performing the following process.

  In the effect setting process, various effects are executed based on the execution timing of the pending change effect determined in the prefetching notice process. First, it is determined whether or not to execute a hold change effect of a non-rotation pattern (step S1631). If it is determined to execute the hold change effect of the non-rotation pattern (Y in step S1631), the target hold display is set to be changed (step S1632), and the process is terminated. The presence or absence of execution of the pending change effect of the non-rotation pattern is determined by checking the value of the effect control buffer setting unit provided in the RAM.

  In step S1631, in the case where the hold change effect of the non-rotation pattern is not executed (N in step S1631), it is determined whether or not the hold change effect of the left rotation pattern is executed (step S1633). If it is determined that the rotation change hold effect is to be executed (Y in step S1633), as shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C, the sub image display device 90 (sub liquid crystal) is rotated counterclockwise. (Step S1634). Next, as shown in FIG. 57B, the hold display is set to operate so as to roll according to the inclination of the sub liquid crystal. Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), it is set to generate an effect at the time of collision (step S1635). Next, as shown in FIG. 57C, setting is made to change the target hold display (step S1636). Next, as shown in FIGS. 57C and 57D, the sub liquid crystal is set to return to the original position (step S1637), and the process is terminated.

  In step S1633, when the left rotation pattern hold change effect is not executed (N in step S1633), it is determined whether or not the right rotation pattern hold change effect is executed (step S1638). When the hold change effect of the right rotation pattern is not executed (N in step S1638), this corresponds to the case where the hold change effect is not executed, and in this case, the process ends. If it is determined to execute the hold change effect of the right rotation pattern (Y in step S1638), if there are two or more current hold memories (this means that the change order of the hold changes changes as will be described later). It is determined whether or not the number is two or more in order to be shown), and the latest hold display is set to be changed (step S1639). However, if there is only one current hold memory, the hold display is set not to change. Thus, in the right rotation pattern, if there are two or more current hold memories, the latest hold display is changed instead of the target hold display.

  Next, the sub image display device 90 (sub liquid crystal) is set to rotate right (step S1640). Next, the hold display is set to operate so as to roll according to the inclination of the sub liquid crystal. Also, an effect is set to occur at the time of collision (step S1641). Next, the target hold display is set to be changed (step S1642). Further, if there is a pending display that has changed, the display is set to be displayed in the normal mode. Next, the sub liquid crystal is set to return to the original position (step S1643), and the process is terminated.

  Based on the setting as described above, effects such as a non-rotation pattern, a left rotation pattern, and a right rotation pattern are performed. Each of the non-rotation pattern, the left rotation pattern, and the right rotation pattern has a predetermined execution schedule (execution timing) for each effect mode set as described above. In the effect setting process, the execution timing data Are set according to the non-rotation pattern, the left rotation pattern, and the right rotation pattern. For example, in the left rotation pattern, the rotation operation and the hold change effect of the sub image display device 90 as shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C are executed in the effect symbol changing process (see step S802).

  As shown in S1638 to S1642, in the right rotation pattern, control is performed to execute a false hold display for the latest hold display, and then the target hold display is changed and the false hold display is displayed in a normal manner. Set to perform control. In this way, it is possible to change the order of holdings displayed in a special manner, as if the order of digestion of the holding display has changed. Therefore, the left rotation pattern and the right rotation pattern can be displayed so that the digest order of the hold display is different. In other words, when the sub image display device 90 (sub liquid crystal) is tilted to one side and tilted to the other side, the order in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is erased when the variable display is started is different. You can make it. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the order of digestion of the hold display.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the display mode of the hold display changes in accordance with the displacement of the sub-image display device 90, so the hold display by the hold change effect. The change of can be clarified. Further, since the hold display is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sub-image display device 90, the player can be focused on the movement of the hold display, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a uniform operation is performed on a plurality of hold displays, the second hold display H2, which is a specific hold display, changes to a special display mode. Therefore, when a plurality of hold displays are displaced in a uniform operation mode, attention can be paid to the movement of the plurality of hold displays, and it can be noted which of the hold displays changes.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the hold display is uniformly rolled and operated, the hold display is collided to display the effect 60 indicating the collision. Therefore, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the effect by the effect 60 according to the uniform operation mode.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the left rotation pattern and the right rotation pattern can be displayed so that the digest order of the hold display is different, so that the player can also pay attention to the digest order of the hold display. it can.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the change effect is executed to change the specific display (active display or hold display), the movable body (the operation means such as the stick controller 122 and the push button 120) The movable member for production (production accessory) may be configured to be operable. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment configured to be able to operate the movable body when the change display is executed to change the specific display will be described.

  Note that in this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that the active display area 9 </ b> A and the combined suspension storage display unit 18 c are displayed on the effect display device 9. Note that the active display area 9A and the combined suspension storage display unit 18c may be configured to be displayed on the sub display device 9S.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 8a in the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b in the first special symbol display unit 8b are arranged in the order of winning in the first start winning unit 13 and the second start winning unit 14. 2 It is assumed that the special symbol variable display is executed. Note that, for example, the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b.

  Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, a movable member 78 formed in a shape imitating a butterfly is provided above the effect display device 9, and for the movable member By driving the motor 78a, it is configured to be operable in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 has a built-in vibrator motor 78b, and the movable member 78 can be oscillated by driving the vibrator motor 78b (FIG. 67). reference).

  Further, in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 1 in the first embodiment, in this embodiment, an operation means in which the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 are integrally attached is provided. However, vibrator motors 126 and 120a are respectively provided below and above the operating means (see FIGS. 68 to 70). In this embodiment, the vibrator motor 126 is driven in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 122 to vibrate below the operation means, so that the stick controller 122 vibrates in conjunction with the operation of the stick controller 122. Control as you do. Further, the vibrator motor 120a is driven in accordance with the operation of the push button 120 to vibrate above the operation means, so that the periphery of the push button 120 is vibrated in conjunction with the operation of the push button 120 Take control.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the vibrator motor 126 for vibration of the stick controller 122 and the vibrator motor 120a for vibration around the push button 120 are separately provided is shown. A common vibration means (vibrator motor) may be provided for the stick controller 122 vibration and the push button 120 peripheral vibration.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a hold change notice effect determination process (step S800A) in the sixth embodiment. In the pending change notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 firstly includes a set of commands at the time of start winning (that is, a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a start winning specifying command (a first start winning specification command or a second start). It is confirmed whether or not a new winning designation command) and a set of combined pending storage number designation commands have been received (step S6501). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) in the start prize command storage area for storing the command for the start prize. , And whether the total pending storage number designation command is newly stored or not can be confirmed. If a command for starting winning a set is not newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

  If a command at the time of a start winning prize is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag indicating that the hold change notice effect has already been determined is set. Confirmation is made (step S6502). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, the processing is ended as it is.

  After the process of step S6502 is executed, after the execution of the hold change notice effect is determined based on the occurrence of a new start prize, the next variation display has not yet started, and the display form of the hold display of the notice target When a new start prize is generated during a period in which has not yet changed, control is performed so as not to repeatedly determine the pending change notice effect.

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the current total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (step S6503). Whether or not the current total pending storage number is 2 or more is specifically stored in the total pending storage number storage area for storing the total pending storage number specified by the total pending storage number designation command. It can be determined by checking the value. If the total pending storage number is not 2 or more, the processing is terminated as it is.

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing of the first to third hold display shift after the start winning. In this case, the display mode of the hold display cannot be changed at the timing of the shift of the hold display unless at least two combined hold memories are accumulated at the timing of the start winning prize. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing the determination process in step S6503, the hold change notice effect can be executed when the combined hold memory number is 2 or more, and the hold change notice effect is determined. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the hold display to be notified is already digested and the display mode cannot be changed at the timing of the hold display shift.

  Even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it may be configured to be able to execute some change notice effect. In this case, for example, after the start winning has occurred, the effect of changing the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area 9A is executed even after the hold display for the advance notice is shifted and deleted. You may comprise. Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a hold change notice effect with an action effect is executed when the hold display is shifted to start the change display. For example, a predetermined second after the start of the change display ( For example, it may be configured to execute the hold change notice effect accompanied by the effect effect during the variable display such as after 10 seconds or after 15 seconds. In this case, even if the total pending storage number is 1, if the execution timing of the pending change notice effect remains in the remaining time of the currently displayed variable display, the pending change notice effect is configured to be executed. May be.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, but for example, the second special winning opening is performed. In gaming machines that are configured to give priority to the variable display of symbols, the variable display of the second special symbol is mostly executed in the high base state, and the execution rate of the variable display of the first special symbol is high in the low base state. Therefore, only the prefetch determination for the first reserved memory may be executed during the low base state, and only the prefetch determination for the second reserved memory may be executed during the high base state. In this case, in step S6503, when the low base state is set, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number that is the target of the prefetch determination is 2 or more. It may be configured to determine whether or not the second reserved storage number that is the target of the above is two or more.

  If the total pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and type of the pending change notice effect based on the received latest variation category command (step S6504). In step S6504, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the hold change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the hold change notice effect, Determine the type.

  The “hold change notice effect” is an effect that changes the hold display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, white round display). . In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the action effect is executed at the timing of the hold display shift, and the effect that the hold display is changed to any special display mode is executed.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold change notice effect determination table in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, the hold change notice effect determination table includes no hold change notice effect, hold change notice effects A-1 to A-3, and hold change notice effects B-1 to B-. 3. Determination values are assigned to the hold change notice effects C-1 to C-3, the hold change notice effects D-1 to D-3, and the hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2, respectively. .

  The on-hold change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are on-hold change notice effects that perform a character effect as an action effect at the timing of the hold display shift and do not involve the action of a movable object as will be described later. Among these, when the hold change notice effect A-1 is executed, only the character effect is executed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change. In addition, when the hold change notice effect A-2 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display. In addition, when the hold change notice effect A-3 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display subject to notice changes to a red round display.

  On-hold change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are on-hold change notice effects in which an effect effect is executed as an action effect at the timing of a hold display shift. Among these, when the hold change notice effect B-1 is executed, only the movable member 78 as the movable object vibrates, and the change of the display mode of the hold display does not occur. The operation of the movable member 78 in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen 9 is not performed. In addition, when the hold change notice effect B-2 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes to a blue round display, and the notice object is displayed. The movable member 78 operates in such a manner that it covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, when the hold change notice effect B-3 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes to a red round display, and the notice object is displayed. The movable member 78 operates in such a manner that it covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes.

  The hold change notice effects C-1 to C-3 are hold change notice effects that execute push button operation suggesting effects as action effects at the timing of shifting the hold display. Among these, when the hold change notice effect C-1 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the push button 120 is suggested. Even if the push button 120 is pressed, the hold display is performed. No change occurs in the display mode, and the vibration operation around the push button 120 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the hold change notice effect C-2 is executed, after the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, the notice target is held according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode of the display changes to a blue round display, and the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. Further, when the hold change notice effect C-3 is executed, after the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, the notice target is held according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode of the display changes to a red round display, and the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes.

  In this embodiment, there are two modes of vibration around the push button 120: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect C-2 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates weakly. In addition, when the hold change notice effect C-3 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates strongly.

  The hold change notice effects D-1 to D-3 are hold change notice effects that execute a stick controller operation suggestion effect as an action effect at the timing of the hold display shift. Of these, when the hold change notice effect D-1 is executed, the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested. Even if the stick controller 122 is tilted, the hold display is displayed. No change occurs in the display mode, and the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the hold change notice effect D-2 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the notice target is held according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The display mode of the display changes to a blue round display, and the stick controller 122 vibrates at a timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. When the hold change notice effect D-3 is executed, the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, and then the notice target is held according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The display mode of the display changes to a red round display, and the stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes.

  In this embodiment, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 includes two vibration modes: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect D-2 is executed and the notice target hold display changes to a blue round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates weakly. In addition, when the hold change notice effect D-3 is executed and the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates strongly.

  In this embodiment, the stick controller 122 may vibrate before the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. The hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are hold change notice effects in which the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes. Among these, when the hold change notice effect E-1 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the stick In accordance with the tilting operation of the controller 122, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display, and the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 continues. Further, when the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed to indicate the operation of the stick controller 122, the stick controller 122 In response to the tilting operation 122, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, and the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 changes to strong vibration.

  However, in this embodiment, even if it is the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2, if the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the stick It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the controller 122 is also stopped. In addition, not only in such a mode, when the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change, the stick controller 122 may be configured not to be changed with a slight fluctuation. .

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are executed, the stick controller 122 is shown to vibrate slightly before the notice display of the hold display to be noticed changes. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. Also, for example, when executing the hold change notice effect E-1, when the stick controller 122 is vibrated weakly and the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed before the display mode of the hold indication to be notified changes. May be configured such that the stick controller 122 is vibrated strongly before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the determination result indicated by the variation category command is non-reach deviation or when the super reach is deviation, the determination result indicated by the variation category command is a super reach big hit. In some cases, execution of the pending change notice effect may be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the super-reach is out of position, the ratio at which any one of the pending change notice effects is executed is higher than when the non-reach is out. . In addition, in the case of a super reach big hit, the ratio at which any one of the pending change notice effects is executed is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pending change notice effect is executed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is higher than when the hold change notice effect is not executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, even if the hold change notice effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the hold display of the notice object changes and there are cases where it does not change. In such a case, the proportion of the hold display to be notified changes to either blue or red round display is higher than in the case of non-reach. In addition, in the case of a super reach big hit, the rate at which the hold display to be notified changes to either blue or red round display is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is higher when the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed than when it is not changed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the non-reach is lost, there is only a case where the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display (when it changes to a red round display). On the other hand, when the super reach is lost or the super reach is a big hit, there are both cases of changing to a blue round display and cases of changing to a red round display. Further, in the case of the super reach big hit, the ratio that the hold display to be notified changes from the blue round display to the red round display is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the notice display is changed to the red round display, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is changed as compared to the case of the blue round display. Is high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, a character effect, an effect effect, a push button operation suggesting effect, and a stick controller operation suggesting effect are executed as action effects executed in the hold change notice effect. Depending on which type of action effect is executed, the determination value allocation in the hold change notice effect determination table is different. For example, when a push button operation suggestion effect or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, a notice display of a hold target for a notice in the case of a super reach big hit is performed, compared with a case where a character effect or an accessory effect is executed. The rate of change of the notice target is high, and the rate of change to the red round display is high.

  In this embodiment, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the operation means such as the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is operated. The determination value allocation in the pending change notice effect determination table differs depending on whether the operation is accompanied. For example, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed, the target of the notice in the case of the super reach big hit is compared with the case where the push button operation effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is performed. The display mode of the hold display is changed to increase the rate at which the operating means vibrates, and the rate at which the operating means is strongly changed by changing to a red round display is increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the hold change notice effect accompanied with the operation of the stick controller 122 is executed, the stick controller 122 vibrates before the notice display of the hold display of the notice target changes (hold change notice). There are productions E-1 to E-2). As shown in FIG. 60, in this embodiment, when the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes, the stick controller 122 is always tilted. Since the hold display for the advance notice changes to a blue or red round display (the hold display does not change), the stick controller 122 has been vibrated before the display form of the hold display for the advance notice changes. For example, it is determined that at least the hold display to be notified changes to either blue or red round display.

  Note that the push button 120 may be configured to vibrate before the display mode of the hold display for the notice target changes, for example, without being limited to the form shown in this embodiment. You may comprise so that it may decide to change to either a blue or red round shape display. Even if any operation means has been vibrated before the display mode of the hold display for the advance notice object is changed, it may be configured that the hold display for the advance notice object is changed to a red round display. Good.

  The hold change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 60 is an example, and various configurations of the hold change notice effect determination table can be considered. For example, in this embodiment, in the case of non-reach, it is configured so that the hold display to be notified only changes to a blue round display, but the red round display at a low rate You may comprise so that it may change to. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where there are only two types of the blue display and the red display as the change mode of the hold display is shown, it is not limited to such a mode, and there are three or more types. You may comprise so that there may be this change aspect. In this case, for example, it may be configured to change to a green round display or a cherry pattern round display, or it is reserved in a different shape (for example, a star shape or a heart shape). You may comprise so that a display may change. Further, for example, when the hold display is changed to a specific mode (for example, a round display of cherry blossoms or a star display), it may be configured that the big hit is confirmed. Further, for example, it may be configured such that the display mode of the hold display is changed whenever the hold change notice effect is executed, and the hold change notice effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60, when an effect effect other than the character effect, a push button operation suggestion effect, or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed as the effect effect, the display mode of the hold display for the notice target changes. Although the case where the movable member 78 always operates at the timing and the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 always perform the vibration operation is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes, a case where the movable member 78 operates and a case where the movable member 78 does not operate is provided, and a case where the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 perform a vibration operation and a vibration operation. You may comprise so that it may be provided. In this case, even if the hold display to be notified changes to the same blue or red round display, the big hit depends on whether or not the movable member 78 is operated and whether or not the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is vibrated. Alternatively, the degree of expectation (reliability) for super reach may be different.

  Further, when configured as described above, for example, the hold display to be notified changes to a red round display, but the operation of the movable member 78 and the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 are not performed. In the case where the hold display of the notice target has changed to a blue round display, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is more when there is an operation of the movable member 78 or a vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120. ) May be high. With such a configuration, for example, the presence / absence of the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 cannot be recognized unless operated, so that the player's willingness to operate can be further promoted.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that there may be a change pattern which changes a pending | holding display in multiple times. For example, when there are two or more fluctuation displays before the notice display, the hold display is changed from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display by the first fluctuation display. There may be a change pattern in which the hold display is further changed from the blue round display to the red round display in the first fluctuation display.

  In this embodiment, the case where a different type of movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, or the push button 120) is operated according to the type of the pending change notice effect is shown. The same movable body may be operated regardless of the type of change notice effect. In this case, it may be configured such that one common movable body operates regardless of the type of the pending change notice effect, or a plurality of common movable bodies may operate. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate in common regardless of the type of the hold change notice effect, or the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, and the push in common regardless of the type of the hold change notice effect You may comprise so that all the buttons 120 may operate | move.

  When execution of the hold notice effect is determined (Y in step S6505), the effect control CPU 101 determines a hold change timing for changing the display mode of the hold display (step S6506). In step S6506, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the hold change timing determination table for determining the hold change timing, and determines the hold change timing.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the hold change timing determination table in the sixth embodiment. Among these, FIG. 61 (A) shows a specific example of a hold change timing determination table (for the sum hold memory number 2) used when the sum hold memory number is two. FIG. 61 (B) shows a specific example of a hold change timing determination table (for a combined hold storage count of 3) used when the combined hold storage count is 3. FIG. 61 (C) shows a specific example of a hold change timing determination table (for a sum of 4 or more pending storages) used when the sum of pending storages is 4 or more.

  In step S6506, the production control CPU 101 first checks the current total pending storage number, and if the total pending storage number is 2, the pending change timing determination table (for total pending storage number 2) shown in FIG. ) Is selected, a lottery process based on a random number is performed using the selected hold change timing determination table (for the total hold memory number 2), and the hold change timing is determined. If the total pending storage number is 3, the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 3) shown in FIG. 61B is selected, and the selected pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 3) is selected. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using and the hold change timing is determined. If the total pending storage number is 4 or more, the pending change timing determination table (for total pending storage number 4 or more) shown in FIG. 61C is selected, and the selected pending change timing determination table (total pending storage number 4) is selected. For the above, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the hold change timing.

  When the total number of reserved storage is 2, after the start winning, the display timing of the hold display is only once, so as shown in FIG. 61 (A), non-reach out, super reach out, and super reach out In any case of the big hit, the timing of the first hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing at a rate of 100%.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 3, after the start winning, there are two timings of the hold display shift, so the timing of the first or second hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing. . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the super reach is a big hit, the second hold display shift is performed at a higher rate compared to the case where the super reach is lost or the non-reach is lost. Is determined as the pending change timing. Further, as shown in FIG. 61B, when the super reach is shifted, the second hold display shift timing is determined as the hold change timing at a higher rate than when the non-reach is shifted. To do. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved storage is 4 or more, the timing of shifting the hold display after the start winning is 3 times, so the timing of the first to third hold display shift is determined as the hold change timing. To do. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), in the case of a super reach big hit, the third hold display shift is performed at a higher rate than in the case where the super reach is lost or non-reach is lost. Is determined as the pending change timing. As shown in FIG. 61C, when the super reach is shifted, the shift timing of the second or third hold display is changed at a higher rate than when the non-reach is shifted. Determine as timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed.

  The hold change timing determination table shown in FIG. 61 is an example, and various hold change timing determination table configurations are possible. For example, in this embodiment, if the total pending storage number is 4 or more, the pending change timing is determined uniformly using the pending change timing determination table (for the total pending storage number 4 or more) shown in FIG. However, a hold change timing determination table for the total hold storage number 5 or a hold change timing determination table for the sum hold storage number 6 may be provided. Further, in this case, for example, the fourth and subsequent hold display shift timings may be determined as the hold change timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes is delayed, but conversely, the display mode of the hold display It may be configured such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit or super reach increases as the timing at which changes change. Further, for example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed at a certain specific timing, it may be configured to be determined to be a big hit or super reach.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pending change notice effect determination flag (step S6507). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the hold change notice effect determined in step S6504 (in this example, the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3, B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-). 3, D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), and the hold change timing determined in step S6506 are stored in the hold change notice effect storage area provided in the RAM (step S6508). In step S6508, the effect control CPU 101 may set a counter for measuring the arrival of the hold change timing determined in step S6506, for example.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S8000 and S8001 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a predetermined display in the active display area 9 </ b> A of the effect display device 9 in the same display mode as the first hold display displayed on the summed hold storage display unit 18 c of the effect display device 9. Active display) is displayed (step S8002). For example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is in a normal mode (in this example, a white round display), the active display area 9A has a white display as a predetermined display. Display a round display. Further, for example, when the first hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a blue round display, a blue round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. . For example, when the first hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a red round display, a red round display is displayed as a predetermined display in the active display area 9A. .

  In this embodiment, the command transmitted at the start of the variation is the interval for each timer interrupt (4 ms interval) in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. ) (See FIGS. 23 to 27). Therefore, in the effect symbol variation start process executed at the stage of receiving up to the display result designation command, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been received yet, and in the stage of step S8002, the pending display is not yet shifted and is added up. The hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started this time should still remain in the hold storage display unit 18c. Therefore, in step S8002, the first hold display (hold display corresponding to the variable display started this time) displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is confirmed, and the active display is displayed in the same display mode. You are in control.

  In step S8002, after a predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the active display area 9A, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received at the next timer interrupt (after 4 ms), and 1 is added from the total pending storage display unit 18c. Since the first hold display is erased, when viewed from the player, it appears that the first hold display of the combined hold storage display portion 18c has shifted to the active display area 9A almost simultaneously.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the hold change notice effect determination flag is set (step S8003). If the hold change notice effect determination flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the hold change timing is reached (step S8500).

  Whether or not it is the hold change timing is determined by, for example, setting a value corresponding to the hold change timing determined in step S6506 of the hold change notice effect determination process in the counter and starting the variable display (every time it ends). Alternatively, the value of the counter can be decremented by 1, and it can be determined by checking whether or not the value of the counter is 0 in step S8500. For example, when the hold change timing is determined to be the timing of the first hold display shift, 1 is set in the counter, and then the counter value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the first variable display is started and becomes 0. Therefore, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the first hold display shift. Also, for example, when the hold change timing is determined as the timing of the second hold display shift, 2 is set in the counter, and then the counter is decremented by 1 each time the change display is started, and the second change display is performed. Since the value of the counter becomes 0 at the timing of starting the hold, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the second hold display shift. Further, for example, when the hold change timing is determined to be the shift timing of the third hold display, the counter is set to 3, and the counter is decremented by 1 each time the change display is started, and the third change display is performed. Since the value of the counter becomes 0 at the timing of starting the hold, it can be determined that the hold change timing has arrived at the timing of the third hold display shift.

  If it is not the pending change timing (N in Step S8500), the process proceeds to Step S8011. If it is the hold change timing (Y in step S8500), the effect control CPU 101 resets the hold change notice effect determination flag (step S8004). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the hold change notice effect stored in the hold change notice effect storage area (see step S6508) provided in the RAM, and processes according to the variation pattern and the hold change notice effect. A table is selected (step S8005). Then, control goes to a step S8012.

  If the hold change notice effect determination flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the active display displayed in step S8002 is the normal mode (step S8501). If it is not the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S8011. That is, the fact that the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (that is, the blue or red round display) is a case where the pending change notice effect has already been executed for the variable display to be started this time. The processing of steps S8502 to S8505 is not executed, and the active display change notice effect described later is not repeatedly executed.

  For example, the hold display can be changed a plurality of times (for example, it is possible to change from the white round display in the normal mode to the blue round display at the first time and to the red round display at the second time). In such a case, even if it is not the normal mode in step S8501, if it is not the final display mode (for example, a blue round display), a further changeable display mode remains. Therefore, the process may proceed to step S8502 and subsequent steps so that the active display change notice effect can be executed.

  If the display mode of the active display is the normal mode (that is, white round display), the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the active display change notice effect based on the received variation pattern command (step) S8502). In step S8502, the effect control CPU 101 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the active display change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the active display change notice effect, and the active display change notice effect. Determine the presence and type.

  The “active display change notice effect” is an effect that changes the active display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, white round display). is there. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect is executed, the display of the active display is started in the normal mode at the start of the change, and then the action effect is executed during the change display and any of the active displays is performed. An effect that changes to the special display mode is executed.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the active display change notice effect determination table in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, the active display change notice effect determination table includes no active display change notice effect, active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3, and active display change notice effect B-. 1 to B-3, active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3, active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3, and active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2, respectively. Judgment value is assigned.

  The active display change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are active display change notice effects that perform a character effect as an action effect and do not involve the action of a movable object as will be described later. Among these, when the active display change notice effect A-1 is executed, only the character effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display is not changed. Further, when the active display change notice effect A-2 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display. Further, when the active display change notice effect A-3 is executed, the character effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed to a red round display.

  The active display change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are active display change notice effects that execute an accessory effect as an action effect. Among these, when the active display change notice effect B-1 is executed, only the movable member 78 as the movable object vibrates, and the display mode of the active display does not change. The operation of the movable member 78 in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the device 9 is not performed. In addition, when the active display change notice effect B-2 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display, and the active display display The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the manner changes. In addition, when the active display change notice effect B-3 is executed, after the movable member 78 as a movable object vibrates, the display mode of the active display changes to a red round display, and the active display display The movable member 78 operates in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the timing when the manner changes.

  Active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3 are active display change notice effects that execute push button operation suggestion effects as action effects. Among these, when the active display change notice effect C-1 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, and the active even if the push button 120 is pressed. The display mode of the display is not changed, and the vibration operation around the push button 120 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, and then the active display is changed according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode changes to a blue round display, and the periphery of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes. Further, when the active display change notice effect C-3 is executed, the push button operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is suggested, and then the active display is changed according to the pressing operation of the push button 120. The display mode changes to a red round display, and the periphery of the push button 120 vibrates at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes.

  In this embodiment, there are two modes of vibration around the push button 120: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed and the active display changes to a blue round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates weakly. Further, when the active display change notice effect C-3 is executed and the active display changes to a red round display, the vicinity of the push button 120 vibrates strongly.

  Active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3 are active display change notice effects that execute stick controller operation suggestion effects as action effects. Among these, when the active display change notice effect D-1 is executed, the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and only the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, and the active even if the stick controller 122 is tilted. The display mode of the display does not change, and the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 as a movable object as described later is not performed. Further, when the active display change notice effect D-2 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the active display is changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode changes to a blue round display and the display mode of the active display changes. In addition, when the active display change notice effect D-3 is executed, after the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, the active display change notification effect D-3 is displayed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 vibrates at the timing when the display mode changes to a red round display and the display mode of the active display changes.

  In this embodiment, the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 includes two vibration modes: weak vibration and strong vibration. In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect D-2 is executed and the active display changes to a blue round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates weakly. Further, when the active display change notice effect D-3 is executed and the active display changes to a red round display, the stick controller 122 vibrates strongly.

  In this embodiment, stick controller 122 may vibrate before the display mode of active display changes. Active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are active display change notice effects in which the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes. Among these, when the active display change notice effect E-1 is executed, after the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started and the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is suggested, In response to the tilting operation of the stick controller 122, the display mode of the active display changes to a blue round display, and the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 continues. When the active display change notice effect E-2 is executed, the stick controller 122 starts weak vibration and the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed to indicate the operation of the stick controller 122. In accordance with the tilting operation of the controller 122, the display mode of the active display changes to a red round display, and the vibration mode of the stick controller 122 changes to strong vibration.

  However, in this embodiment, even if it is the active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2, if the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the active display does not change, It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the stick controller 122 is also stopped. In addition, not only in such a mode, when the tilt operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed and the display mode of the active display does not change, the stick controller 122 may be configured not to be changed with a weak fluctuation. .

  In this embodiment, when the active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated weakly before the display mode of the active display is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, for example, when executing the active display change notice effect E-1, when the stick controller 122 is weakly vibrated before the display mode of the active display is changed, the active display change notice effect E-2 is executed. The stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate strongly before the display mode of the active display changes.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is a non-reach variation pattern, a reach variation variation pattern, or a big hit variation pattern. The execution of the active display change notice effect may be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, when the super reach is shifted, the proportion of execution of one of the active display change notice effects is higher than when the non-reach is shifted. Yes. Further, in the case of a super reach big hit, the rate at which any one of the active display change notice effects is executed is higher than in the case where the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the active display change notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit and super reach is higher than when the active display change notice effect is not executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, even if the active display change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may or may not change, but the super reach is deviated. In such a case, the rate at which the active display changes to either blue or red round display is higher than in the case of non-reach. Further, when the super reach hit is big, the ratio of the active display changing to either the blue or red round display is higher than when the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the active display is changed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit and the super reach is higher than when the display mode is not changed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, the active display only changes to a blue round display when there is a non-reach (no change to a red round display). On the other hand, when the super reach is lost or the super reach is a big hit, there are both cases of changing to a blue round display and cases of changing to a red round display. Further, when the super reach hit is big, the rate at which the active display changes from the blue round display to the red round display is higher than when the super reach is lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the active display is changed to the red round display, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit and the super reach is higher than when the active display is changed to the blue round display. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, a character effect, an accessory effect, a push button operation suggesting effect, and a stick controller operation suggesting effect are executed as action effects executed in the active display change notice effect. In some cases, the allocation of determination values in the active display change notice effect determination table differs depending on which type of effect effect is executed. For example, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the active display notice target in the case of a super reach big hit is compared with the case where the character effect or the accessory effect is executed. The rate of change is high, and the rate of change to red round display is high.

  In this embodiment, when the push button operation suggestion effect or the stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the operation means such as the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is operated. The determination value allocation in the active display change notice effect determination table differs depending on whether the operation is accompanied. For example, when the stick controller operation effect is executed and accompanied by the operation of the stick controller 122, the active display in the case of a super reach big hit as compared with the case where the push button operation effect is executed and the push button 120 is operated is performed. The display mode is changed and the rate at which the operating means vibrates is increased, and the rate at which the operating means is strongly changed by changing to a red round display is increased.

  In this embodiment, when an active display change notice effect with an operation of the stick controller 122 is executed, the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes (active display change notice effect). E-1 to E-2). As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, when the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes, the active display is always displayed if the stick controller 122 is tilted. Since the display changes to a blue or red round display (the active display does not change), if the stick controller 122 vibrates before the display mode of the active display changes, at least the active display is blue or red. It will be determined that the display will change to one of the round displays.

  Note that the push button 120 may be configured to vibrate before the display mode of the active display is changed, and the active display is a blue or red round shape. You may comprise so that it may determine that it changes in any of display. If any of the operating means has oscillated before the display mode of the active display is changed, the active display may be determined to change to a red round display.

  Note that the active display change notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 63 is an example, and various configurations of the active display change notice effect determination table can be considered. For example, in this embodiment, in the case of non-reach, the active display is configured to change only to a blue round display, but changes to a red round display at a low rate. You may comprise so that there may be a case. Further, in this embodiment, the case where there are only two types of change modes of the active display, that is, a blue round display and a red round display, is shown. You may comprise so that there may be this change aspect. In this case, for example, it may be configured to change to a green round display or a cherry pattern round display, or active in a different shape (for example, a star shape or a heart shape). You may comprise so that a display may change. Further, for example, when the active display is changed to a specific mode (for example, a round display of cherry blossoms or a star display), it may be configured to be a big hit. Further, for example, the active display change notice effect may be changed whenever the active display change notice effect is executed, and the active display change notice effect of the gas display may not be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 63, when an effect effect other than a character effect, a push button operation suggestion effect, or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed as the action effect, the timing at which the display mode of the active display is changed. Although the case where the movable member 78 always operates and the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 always operate in a vibrating manner is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the display mode of the active display is changed, a case where the movable member 78 operates and a case where the movable member 78 does not operate are provided, a case where the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 perform a vibration operation, and a case where the vibration operation does not occur. May be provided. In this case, even if the active display changes to the same blue or red round display, the big hit or super reach is determined depending on whether or not the movable member 78 is operated and whether or not the stick controller 122 or the push button 120 is vibrated. You may comprise so that the expectation degree (reliability) with respect to may differ.

  Further, when configured as described above, for example, the active display changes to a red round display, but the active display is more active than the case where there is no operation of the movable member 78 or vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120. Is changed to a blue round display, but the expectation (reliability) for the big hit or super reach is higher when there is an operation of the movable member 78 or a vibration operation around the stick controller 122 or the push button 120. It may be configured. With such a configuration, for example, the presence / absence of the vibration operation around the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 cannot be recognized unless operated, so that the player's willingness to operate can be further promoted.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that there may be a change pattern which changes an active display in multiple times. For example, when the variable display for executing the active display change notice effect is a variable display with pseudo-continuous, the active display is changed from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display by the first re-variation. There may be a change pattern in which the active display is further changed from the blue round display to the red round display by the second re-variation.

  In this embodiment, the case where a different type of movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, or the push button 120) operates according to the type of the active display change notice effect is shown. The same movable body may be operated regardless of the type of the active display change notice effect. In this case, regardless of the type of the active display change notice effect, it may be configured such that one common movable body operates, or a plurality of common movable bodies may operate. For example, the stick controller 122 may be configured to vibrate in common regardless of the type of the active display change notice effect, or the movable member 78, the stick controller 122, In addition, all of the push buttons 120 may be configured to operate.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, separate determination processing is performed using separate tables when determining the pending change notice effect and when determining the active display change notice effect. In such a case, the processing mode is not limited to the case where the presence / absence and type of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect are determined. For example, in the hold change notice effect determination process of FIG. 59 executed at the time of winning the start, the presence / absence and type of the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are determined in a lump using a common table by the decision process 1. You may comprise as follows.

  When the execution of the active display change notice effect is determined (Y in step S8503), the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the active display change notice effect determined in step S8502 (in this example, the active display change notice effect). A-1 to A-3, B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3, D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), an active display change provided in the RAM Store in the notice effect storage area (step S8504). Further, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the active display change notice effect (step S8505). Then, control goes to a step S8012.

  When the display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (N at Step S8501), when it is decided not to execute the active display change notice effect (N at Step S8503), or when it is not the hold change timing (Step S8500) In N), the production control CPU 101 selects a normal process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S8011). Then, control goes to a step S8012.

  Note that the processes in steps S8012-S8016 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  FIGS. 64 and 65 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol changing process (step S802) according to the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S8101 to S8105 are the same as the processes shown in the first embodiment.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied by the character effect as the action effect (the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 or the active display change notice effect A-1). ~ A-3 is executed), and it is confirmed whether or not it is the start timing of the character effect (step S8601). Note that the start timing of the character effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the character effect, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the character on the effect display device 9 and starts executing the character effect (step S8602). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  If it is not the start timing of the character effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied by the accessory effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect B-1 to B-3 or Whether or not the active display change notice effects B-1 to B-3 are to be executed) and whether the start timing of the accessory effect is confirmed (step S8603). In addition, the start timing of an accessory effect should just be predetermined by the effect control pattern etc., for example. If it is the start timing of the accessory effect, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to drive the vibrator motor 78b and start the vibration operation of the movable member 78 (step S8604). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is vibrated as an effect effect, and then the movable member 78 moves greatly in such a manner that it covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to display the hold. However, the present invention is not limited to such a production mode. However, the production mode is not limited to such a production mode. For example, the movable member 78 is configured to incorporate a light emitting body such as an LED, and by performing light control on the LED, the actor plays a role in such a manner that the movable member 78 emits light. You may comprise so that it may speak. Further, for example, an effect display may be performed in the vicinity of the movable member 78 of the effect display device 9 (in this example, above the display screen) so as to give the player a sense of expectation.

  If it is not the start timing of the accessory effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied with the push button operation suggestion effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect C-1 to C). -3 and active display change notice effects C-1 to C-3), it is checked whether or not the push button operation suggesting effect is started (step S8605). The start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 displays characters such as “Press the push button!” On the effect display device 9 and starts executing the push button operation suggestion effect ( Step S8606). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  If it is not the start timing of the push button operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 executes the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect accompanied by the stick controller operation suggestion effect as the action effect (hold change notice effect D-1). ~ D-3, E-1 to E-2 and active display change notice effects D-1 to D-3, E-1 to E-2), and the stick controller operation suggestion effect start timing It is confirmed whether or not (step S8607). Note that the start timing of the stick controller operation suggestion effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the start timing of the stick controller operation suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 101 performs character display such as “Close the stick controller!” On the effect display device 9 and starts executing the stick controller operation suggestion effect ( Step S8608).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 before the notice display of the hold display to be notified changes (the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2 or the active display change notice effect E). -1 to E-2) (step S8609). If the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed, the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate by weak vibration. Is started (step S8610). Then, control goes to a step S8611.

  Note that a plurality of types of push button operation suggestion effects and stick controller operation suggestion effects may be provided. For example, a character display such as “Press the push button!” Or “Drag the stick controller!” Is displayed in a large size or a small size, depending on which size is displayed. In addition, the degree of expectation as to whether the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, or the degree of expectation as to whether the display mode changes from blue round display to red round display may be different. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 may be started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed by executing the processing of steps S8609 to S8610. As a part of the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect, the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect which are accompanied by the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are configured to be executable. Also good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the action effect end timing is reached (step S8611). Note that the end timing of the action effect may be determined in advance by, for example, an effect control pattern. If it is the end timing of the effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed (step S8612). Specifically, hold change notice effects A-2 to A-3, B-2 to B-3, C-2 to C-3, D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E-2 and active Display change notice effects A-2 to A-3, B-2 to B-3, C-2 to C-3, D-2 to D-3, and E-1 to E-2) For example, it can be determined that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed. Also, if the hold change notice effects A-1, B-1, C-1, D-1 and the active display change notice effects A-1, B-1, C-1, D-1 are executed). Therefore, it can be determined that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is not changed.

  If it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is not changed (N in step S8612), the process ends as it is. In this case, the character display is erased to end the character effect, the vibration operation of the movable member 78 is stopped, the accessory effect is ended, and the push button operation suggestion effect and the stick controller operation suggestion effect are ended. The control of operating the movable member 78 in a manner that covers a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 without changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which will be described later, only by ending the action effect, Also, the control for vibrating the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is not performed.

  In addition, when it determines with it being a case where the hold display and active display of a notice object are not changed (when it determines with N by step S8612), it has failed in change in each hold change notice effect or each active display change notice effect. It is desirable that the presentation control to be notified is performed. For example, when a hold change notice effect or an active display change notice effect with a character effect is being executed, the hold display or the active display does not change, and the effect display is displayed as if the character is disappointed. You may notify that it failed. In addition, for example, when a holding change notice effect or an active display change notice effect accompanied by an accessory effect is executed, the vibration operation of the movable member 78 is stopped or the light emission control of the movable member 78 is performed. In such a case, the light emission may be stopped, or if the effect display is being performed, the effect display may be deleted to notify that the change has failed. Further, when a hold change notice effect or an active display change notice effect accompanied with a push button operation suggestion effect or a stick controller operation suggestion effect is executed, the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated when an operation is performed. The button operation suggestion display and the stick controller operation suggestion display may be deleted, and an effect sound corresponding to the change failure may be output or the LED or lamp emission control may be performed to notify that the change has failed.

  When it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed (Y in step S8612), the effect control CPU 101 is executing the accessory effect (hold change notification effect B-2). Or B-3 or active display change notice effects B-2 to B-3) (step S8613). If it is the case where the effect production is executed, the production control CPU 101 operates in such a manner that the movable member 78 is covered with a part of the display screen of the production display device 9 by driving the movable member motor 78a. Control is performed (step S8614). And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for effect control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect B-2 is being executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect B-3 is being executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. Further, for example, if the active display change notice effect B-2 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect B-3 is executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  If it is not the case where the accessory effect is executed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the push button operation suggestion effect (the hold change notice effect C-2 to C-3 or the active display change notice effect C- Whether or not 2 to C-3 has been executed) (step S8615). If a push button operation suggesting effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 101 has detected whether or not a pressing operation from the push button 120 has been detected (specifically, an operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 has been input). Whether or not) has been confirmed (step S8616). If the pressing operation from the push button 120 is not detected (N in step S8616), the process is terminated as it is. That is, even if it is determined to change the hold display or active display to be notified, if the operation by the push button 120 is not performed, the change of the display mode of the hold display or active display described later is Neither is it executed, nor is control for causing the push button 120 to vibrate.

  If the pressing operation from the push button 120 is detected (Y in step S8616), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 120a and pushes the button 120 with the strength according to the change mode of the hold display or the active display. The periphery is vibrated (step S8617). For example, if the hold change notice effect C-2 or the active display change notice effect C-2 is executed, the vicinity of the push button 120 is vibrated by weak vibration, and the hold change notice effect C-3 or the active display change is performed. If the notice effect C-3 has been executed, the vicinity of the push button 120 is vibrated by strong vibration. And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for effect control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect C-2 is being executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect C-3 is being executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. For example, if the active display change notice effect C-2 is being executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect C-3 is being executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  If the push button operation suggestion effect is not executed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the stick controller operation suggestion effect (holding change notice effect D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E). -2 or active display change notice effects D-2 to D-3, E-1 to E-2) (step S8618). If the stick controller operation suggestion effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 101 has detected whether or not the tilt operation from the stick controller 122 has been detected (specifically, the operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 123). (Step S8619). If the tilting operation from the stick controller 122 has not been detected (N in step S8619), the process ends. That is, even if it is determined to change the hold display or active display to be notified, if the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the change in the display mode of the hold display or active display described later is The control is not performed and the stick controller 122 is vibrated.

  In this embodiment, when the hold change notice effects E-1 to E-2 and the active display change notice effects E-1 to E-2 are executed, the change has already been made before the change of the hold display or the active display. Although the stick controller 122 is slightly changed, even in this case, if the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the change of the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which will be described later, is not executed, and the stick controller 122 It is assumed that the weak fluctuation of the controller 122 is stopped.

  If the tilting operation from the stick controller 122 is detected (Y in step S8619), the effect control CPU 101 drives the vibrator motor 126 and controls the stick controller 122 according to the intensity according to the change mode of the hold display or active display. Is vibrated (step S8620). For example, if the hold change notice effect D-2 or E-1 or the active display change notice effect D-2 or E-1 is being executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated by weak vibration, and the hold change notice effect is produced. If D-3 or E-2 or active display change notice effect D-3 or E-2 has been executed, the stick controller 122 is vibrated by strong vibration. And it transfers to step S8621 and CPU101 for effect control performs control which changes to the display mode which determined the hold display or active display of notification object (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect D-2 or E-1 has been executed, the hold display to be notified is changed to a blue round display, and the hold change notice effect D-3 or E-2 is executed. If so, the hold display subject to notice is changed to a red round display. For example, if the active display change notice effect D-2 or E-1 is being executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and the active display change notice effect D-3 or E-2 is changed. If it has been executed, the active display is changed to a red round display.

  If the character effect is being executed (if the hold change notice effect A-2 to A-3 or the active display change notice effect A-2 to A-3 is being executed), steps S8613 and S8615 are performed. , S8618 are determined to be N, respectively, without proceeding to steps S8613 to S8614, S8616 to S8617, and S8619 to S8620, the process proceeds to step S8621 as it is, and the effect control CPU 101 performs the hold display or active of the notice target Control to change the display mode to the determined display mode is performed (step SS8621). For example, if the hold change notice effect A-2 is being executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect A-3 is being executed, a notice is given. Change the target hold display to a red round display. Further, for example, if the active display change notice effect A-2 is executed, the active display is changed to a blue round display, and if the active display change notice effect A-3 is executed. Change the active display to a red round display.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed by executing the determination process in step S8616 or step S8619, the push button 120 or In the case where the operation by the stick controller 122 is not performed, the case where the change of the display mode of the hold display or the active display is not executed is shown. For example, when the operation by the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is not performed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target may be changed at the end of a predetermined operation valid period.

  Note that the processes in steps S8118 to S8119 are the same as those described in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, the processing in steps S8106 to S8117 shown in the first embodiment is omitted in the effect symbol variation processing. However, the processing in steps S8106 to S8117 is also performed in this embodiment. May be configured to execute the action effect A and the action effect B.

  Next, a description will be given of the effects of the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect. FIGS. 66-70 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in 6th Embodiment. In FIGS. 66 to 70, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). In the example shown in FIGS. 66 to 70, the second hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the hold display to be notified.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 66 to 70, the effect mode of the hold change notice effect is shown as an example, but the effect of the active display change notice effect is also changed from the hold display to the active display. It is the same as the production mode shown in FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 66, description will be made on the effect mode of the hold notice effect with the character effect as the action effect. As shown in FIG. 66 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the character image is displayed at the start timing of the character effect. Is started and the execution of the character effect is started (see steps S8601 and S8602). Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a display in which the character throws the ball is performed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (C), whether the ball hits the hold display for the notice target and has exploded. Is displayed.

  Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), if the display mode of the hold display is changed (when the hold change notice effects A-2 to A-3 are executed), The display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect A-1 is executed), the character image is simply deleted and the character effect is ended, and the display mode of the hold display is not changed. (Refer to N in Step S8612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, an effect aspect of the hold notice effect accompanied by the accessory effect as the effect effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three reserved displays are displayed in the combined reserved storage display unit 18c, the start of the effect rendering is performed. By executing the motor 78b and starting the vibration operation of the movable member 78, the execution of the accessory effect is started (see steps S8603 and S8604).

  Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), if the display mode of the hold display is changed (when hold change notice effects B-2 to B-3 are executed) By driving the movable member motor 78a, the movable member 78 is operated so as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (see step S8614). In addition, as shown in FIG. 67B, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect B-1 is executed), the movable member 78 is operated in such a manner as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Control is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8612).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of an effect mode of a hold notice effect accompanied by a push button operation suggesting effect as an action effect. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the start timing of the push button operation suggesting effect is reached. The effect display device 9 displays characters such as “Press the push button!” And the execution of the push button operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8605 and S8606).

  Note that the push button operation suggestion display mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified may be changed to an image simulating the push button 120 and displayed. In this case, instead of the character display such as “Press the push button!” Shown in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed to an image simulating the push button 120 and displayed. Thus, the image imitating the push button 120 may be configured to also serve as a push button operation suggestion display. Also, after changing the display of the hold display or active display for the advance notice to an image simulating the push button 120, a push button operation suggestion display is displayed by a character display such as "Press the push button!" You may comprise so that it may display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), it is assumed that the push button 120 is pressed by the player. Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 68C, if the display mode of the hold display is changed (when the hold change notice effects C-2 to C-3 are executed), Based on the detection of the pressing operation on the push button 120 (see Y in step S8616), the vibrator motor 120a is driven to vibrate by weak fluctuation or strong fluctuation (see step S8617). In addition, as shown in FIG. 68C, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect C-1 is executed), the vibration operation around the push button 120 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (step S8612). N reference). In this embodiment, even when the push button 120 is not pressed, the vibration operation around the push button 120 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8616).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of an effect aspect of a hold notice effect accompanied by a stick controller operation suggestion effect as an effect effect. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the start timing of the stick controller operation suggesting effect is reached. Then, characters such as “Draw stick controller!” Are displayed on the effect display device 9, and execution of the stick controller operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8607 and S8608).

  Note that the stick controller operation suggestion display mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the on-hold display or active display mode of the notice target may be changed to an image simulating the stick controller 122 and displayed. In this case, instead of the character display such as “Press the stick controller!” Shown in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target is changed to an image imitating the stick controller 122 and displayed. Thus, the image imitating the stick controller 122 may be configured to also serve as a stick controller operation suggestion display. In addition, after changing the display of the hold display or active display of the advance notice to an image imitating the stick controller 122, a stick controller operation suggestion display is displayed by a character display such as "Press the stick controller!" You may comprise so that it may display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), it is assumed that the player has performed the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 69C, if the display mode of the hold display is changed (when the hold change notice effects D-2 to D-3 are executed), Based on the detection of the tilting operation of the stick controller 122 (see Y in step S8619), the vibrator motor 126 is driven to vibrate by weak fluctuation or strong fluctuation (see step S8620). Further, as shown in FIG. 69C, the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes from the normal mode (white round display) to the blue round display or the red round display (see step S8621). . On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold display is not changed (when the hold change notice effect D-1 is executed), the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (in step S8612). N). In this embodiment, even if the tilt operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8619).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the stick controller operation suggesting effect is executed as the effect effect, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 may be started before the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70A, in the state where the active display is displayed in the active display area 9A and the three hold displays are displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the stick controller operation suggestion effect starts. At the timing, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as “Draw stick controller!” And the execution of the stick controller operation suggesting effect is started (see steps S8607 and S8608). Further, before the display mode of the hold display is changed, as shown in FIG. 70A, by driving the vibrator motor 126, the stick controller 122 is started to vibrate by weak vibration (step S8609). , S8610).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70B, it is assumed that the player has performed the tilting operation of the stick controller 122. Then, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 70C, based on the detection of the tilting operation of the stick controller 122 (see Y in step S8619), the display mode of the hold display of the notice target Changes from a normal mode (white round display) to a blue round display or a red round display (see step S8621). In this case, if the hold change notice effect E-1 is executed and the display changes to a blue round display, the weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is continued, and the hold change notice effect E-2 is executed to display a red round display. In the case of changing to, the stick controller 122 changes to strong fluctuation. On the other hand, if the tilt operation of the stick controller 122 is not performed, the vibration operation of the stick controller 122 is stopped, and the display mode of the hold display does not change (see N in step S8619).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, a change effect (in this example, a hold change notice effect and an active display change notice effect) is executed. When the display mode of the specific display (in this example, hold display, active display) changes, the movable body (in this example, the movable member 78, the push button 120, and the stick controller 122) can be operated ( In this example, the movable member 78 can be operated, and the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 can be vibrated). Therefore, similar to the first embodiment, the effect of changing effects can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the change effect (in this example, the hold change notice effect, the active display change notice effect), the movable member 78 is operated, or the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is vibrated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by moving the movable body as an effect different from the change effect, the movable body may be configured to operate when the change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control that succeeds or fails in the change of the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) as the movable body. I do. Then, the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated). Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by operating the operation means when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful.

  In this embodiment, the case where the operating means such as the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated is shown. However, the operation mode is not limited thereto. For example, it is configured so that some movable parts are provided inside or outside the operation means, and the operation means is caused to operate a movable part provided inside or outside according to the operation, or a move provided inside or outside in the event of a chance. (For example, the operation means is composed of a transparent member or a semi-transparent member, and a decorative body that can be vibrated is provided inside, so that the decorative body can be visually recognized as moving. May be). As such, it is only necessary to be configured to be able to operate the operation unit when the change of the display mode of the specific display is successful by some method, not limited to the vibration operation of the operation unit itself.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control that succeeds or fails in the change of the display mode of the specific display based on the operation of the operating means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) as the movable body. I do. Then, the operating means is operated when performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are vibrated). In addition, there is a case where the operating means is operated before performing control that succeeds in changing the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the hold change notice effect E-1 to E-2 and the active display change notice effect E-1). When executing E-2, weak vibration of the stick controller 122 is started before the hold display or the active display to be notified changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect. In particular, in this embodiment, if the stick controller 122 is oscillating before the hold display or active display changes, at least the hold display or active display changes to either blue or red round display. Is confirmed, and an unexpected production can be realized.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the change effect can be executed in a mode that does not use the operation means (in this example, the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 with the character effect and the active display change notice effect) A-1 to A-3 can be executed). Further, when the change effect is executed in a mode that does not use the operation means, the change effect can be executed in a mode in which the operation means is not operated (in this example, the hold change notice effect A-1 to A-3 or active When the display change notice effects A-1 to A-3 are executed, the vibration operation of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not performed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect by providing the operation means not to operate.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes (in this example, a blue round display or a red round display). is there. Then, depending on which display mode the specific display is changed to, the movable body is operated in a different operation mode (in this example, the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is changed when changing to a blue round display). In the case of a slight change and a change to a red round display, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are strongly changed). Therefore, the production effect can be improved by changing the operation mode of the movable body.

  In this embodiment, as a method of changing the operation mode of the movable body, the case where the strength (weak vibration and strong vibration) of the vibration operation of the movable body is made different is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, you may make it vary the vibration period of a movable body. In this case, for example, when changing to a blue round display, the vibration period of the stick controller 122 as a movable body is shortened, and when changing to a red round display, the vibration period of the stick controller 122 is lengthened. May be. As long as the operation mode of the movable body is different depending on the change mode of the hold display or the active display in any form.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of operation means (in this example, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122) are provided as the movable body. Then, the degree of advantage varies depending on which operation means is used to execute the change effect (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the stick controller operation effect is executed and the operation of the stick controller 122 is performed. When the push button operation effect is executed and the operation of the push button 120 is performed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target in the case of the super reach big hit is changed and the operation unit The rate at which the operating means vibrates is increased, and the rate at which the operating means is strongly changed by changing to a red round display is increased). Therefore, since the degree of advantage varies depending on which operation means is used, it is possible to improve the effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are provided as a plurality of types of operation means has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a jog dial, a cross key, a touch panel, or the like may be provided as the operation means, and various modes may be considered as a plurality of types of operation means.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation means vibrates by changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display as an advantage depending on which operation means is used. While the ratio is different, the ratio of the operation means to be strongly fluctuated with the change to the red round display is high, but as such, depending on which operation means it is, the advantage is , Presence / absence of change of hold display or active display, change mode (whether it is a blue or red round display), the operation rate of the operation means, any one of the operation modes of the operation means, plural, Or what is necessary is just to be comprised so that all may differ.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the operation ratio and operation mode of the operation means are different in conjunction with the presence / absence of changes in the hold display and the active display, but this is not the only mode. For example, when configured so that the hold display or active display may not change even if the operation means operates, the presence or absence of operation of the operation means and the operation mode are set regardless of whether the hold display or active display changes. You may comprise so that it may differ. It is sufficient that the advantage differs depending on what type of operation means is used.

  In this embodiment, the case where the movable member 78, the push button 120, and the stick controller 122 are used as the movable body has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device) may be configured to be operable as a movable body. FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the effect mode of the reserved display change notice effect when the sub display device is configured to be operable as a movable body. In FIG. 71, the display screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C). In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 71, the effect mode of the hold change notice effect is shown as an example, but the effect of the active display change notice effect is also changed from the hold display to the active display. It is the same as that of the production | presentation aspect shown in FIG.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 71, a sub display device 9S (sub display device) is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9 (main display device), and the active display area 9A is displayed on the sub display device 9S to display the active display. At the same time, it is assumed that the combined hold storage display unit 18c is displayed on the sub display device 9S and the hold display is displayed. In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 71, it is assumed that the second hold display displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c is a hold display to be notified. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the active display and the three hold displays are displayed on the sub display device 9S. For example, the entire display is displayed in a smaller size or the hold display is displayed in two stages. Alternatively, the active display and the eight hold displays may all be displayed.

  71 shows the case where the sub display device 9S is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9, the sub display device 9S displays the effect as in the first embodiment. It may be provided below the device 9.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 71, when it is the start timing of the effect, the vibration operation of the sub display device 9S is started as shown in FIG. Next, at the end timing of the effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the sub display device 9S is rotated (in this example, rotated clockwise), and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. The normal mode (white round display) is changed to the blue round display or the red round display. Then, as shown in FIG. 71C, the sub display device 9S is rotated in the reverse direction (in this example, rotated counterclockwise) to return the sub display device 9S to its original position.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 71, it is possible to operate the display means (in this example, the secondary display device 9S) provided with a display area for specific display as a movable body. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by operating the display means provided with the display area for specific display.

  The operation mode of the sub display device 9S is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. For example, the sub display device 9 </ b> S may be configured to operate so as to overlap the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, for example, the sub display device 9S does not overlap the effect display device 9 at the initial position, but moves to a position overlapping the effect display device 9 when the sub display device 9S operates. May be. On the contrary, the sub display device 9S overlaps the effect display device 9 at the initial position, but moves to a position not overlapping the effect display device 9 when the sub display device 9S operates. May be.

  In this embodiment, both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are configured to be executable, and the display modes of both the hold display and the active display are configured to be changeable. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect may be configured to be executable, and only one display mode of the hold display or the active display may be configured to be changeable.

  In addition, the configuration for operating the movable body when changing the hold display or the active display in the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect shown in this embodiment is appropriately the structure shown in the first embodiment. It is possible to configure a gaming machine by applying. For example, in the configuration in which the effect effect A and the effect effect B are executed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) described in the first embodiment, When the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect shown in the form is applied and the hold display or the active display changes, the movable member 78 is operated, or the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is vibrated. You may comprise as follows.

  Note that it is also possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to sixth embodiments described above, the configurations of the respective modifications shown in FIG. 71, and the like. is there. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to sixth embodiments and modifications described above are appropriately combined, or all the embodiments and You may make it comprise a game machine combining the structure shown in the modification.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is not connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in such a case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous (the production in which one or more temporary stoppages and re-variations are performed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode, an example in which one change pattern command is transmitted when starting change is shown, but the change pattern is generated with two or more commands. You may make it notify to the microcomputer 100 for control. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 is the first command before reaching a reach such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is a so-called “reach” when the reach is reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a redrawing effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the variation time after a 2nd stop) and a variation aspect. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific change mode executed at each timing. . When two commands are transmitted, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After transmitting the first command, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the following A second command may be sent (in a timer interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, production symbols, and normal symbols are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and encloses a game medium such as a game ball to give a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, whether or not the game control microcomputer 560 is a big hit or a winning determination (pre-reading determination) of the variation pattern type is performed, and a command (designation designating) indicating the winning determination result is performed. Command, variable category command) is transmitted, and on the production control microcomputer 100 side, the case of executing the hold change notice effect based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the winning control determination (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko machine 8a First special symbol display 8b Second special symbol display 9 Production display device (main display device)
9A Active display area 9S Sub display device (sub display device)
13 First Start Winning Port 14 Second Start Winning Port 18c Total Hold Memory Display Unit 20 Special Variable Winning Ball Device 31 Game Control Board (Main Board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 78 Movable member 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
120 push button 122 stick controller

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
First display means having a first effect display area and second display means having a second effect display area;
A movable body for production used for production,
A plurality of types of operation means that can be operated by the player;
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display as hold storage;
Specific display execution means capable of executing display of specific display in the first effect display area;
And a change suggested demonstration execution unit capable of executing the change suggested effect suggesting a change in the specific display of the display mode,
The production movable body and the operation means are operable,
The change suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the change suggestion effect accompanied by the operation of the effect movable body and the change suggestion effect that prompts an operation to the operation means.
The specific display executing means includes
As specific display, hold display corresponding to hold storage and corresponding display corresponding to variable display being executed are executed.
According to the displacement of the position of the first effect display area, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display to a special mode that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
Even when the position of the first effect display area is not displaced, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display to the special mode,
When the change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes, the effect movable body can be operated,
When the change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes, it is possible to operate the operation means ,
Before Symbol change suggested directing execution means,
The change suggestion effect can be executed so that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on which operation means is urged to perform the operation during the execution of the change suggestion effect,
As the change suggestion effect, the first change suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display in the first effect display region, and the aspect straddling the first effect display region and the second effect display region. a second change suggested directing suggest changes in the specific display of the display mode, it is possible to execute,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the first change suggestion effect or the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display is changed,
The display mode of the specific display may not change even if any of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed,
The gaming machine characterized in that the rate of change of the display mode of the specific display varies depending on which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed.

Images